Nikon | Z 6 | Nikon Z 7 Reference Manual for firmware version 2.00 and later

Nikon Z 7 Reference Manual for firmware version 2.00 and later
DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
This manual is for camera firmware versions 2.00 and later.
• Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.
• To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
“For Your Safety” (page xvi).
• After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible
place for future reference.
En
Choose from 3 different manuals.
 For a guide to all aspects of camera operation, read:
The Reference Manual (this manual)
In addition to the material covered in the User’s
Manual supplied with the camera, the Reference
Manual details the options available in the camera
menus and covers such topics as connecting the
camera to other devices (for information on wireless networks, see the
Network Guide).
Among the topics covered in the Reference Manual are:
• Basic shooting and playback
operations
• Advanced shooting options
• The camera menus
• Connecting to computers, printers,
and HDMI devices
• Flash photography using optional
flash units
The Reference Manual can also be viewed online in html format.
nikon online manual Z 7
https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/z7_z6/en/
Z 7 Model Name: N1710
Z 6 Model Name: N1711
Z6
 For a guide to basic shooting and playback, read:
The User’s Manual (included)
Master basic camera operations as well as features
specific to this camera.
• Table of Contents
• Getting to Know the Camera
• First Steps
• Basic Photography and Playback
• Basic Settings
• Shooting Controls
• The i Menu
• Menu List
• Troubleshooting
 For information on wireless connections, read:
The Network Guide (pdf)
The Network Guide covers such topics as connecting
the camera via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth to a computer or to
a smart device such as a smartphone or tablet, and
the tasks that can be performed using a WT-7
wireless transmitter.
•
•
The Network Guide is available from the Nikon Download Center.
nikon download center Z 7
Z6
Z 7: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/492/Z_7.html
Z 6: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/493/Z_6.html
i
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
BF-N1 body cap
DK-29 rubber eyecup
(comes attached to
camera, 0 415)
Camera
EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion
battery with terminal cover
MH-25a battery charger (comes
with either an AC wall adapter or
power cable of a type and shape
that varies with the country or
region of sale)
AN-DC19 strap (0 27)
Warranty
User’s Manual
EH-7P charging AC adapter (Z 7
only; supplied with a plug
adapter attached in countries or
regions where required; shape
depends on country of sale—
0 29)
HDMI/USB cable clip (0 417)
UC-E24 USB cable (0 337)
BS-1 accessory shoe cover
(0 416)
Memory cards are sold separately. Purchasers of lens or mount
adapter kits should confirm that the package contains a lens or
mount adapter (manuals for the lens or adapter may also be
provided).
The Nikon Download Center
In addition to the Reference Manual, you can also visit the Nikon
download center to download product manuals, firmware updates,
and software such as ViewNX-i.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
ii
About This Manual
This manual is for use with both the Z 7 and Z 6. The illustrations show
the Z 7.
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
D
This icon marks notes, information that should be read before
using this product.
A
This icon marks tips, additional information you may find
helpful when using this product.
0
This icon marks references to other sections in this manual.
Menu items, options, and messages that appear in the camera displays
are shown in bold. Throughout this manual, the display in camera
monitor and viewfinder during shooting is referred to as the “shooting
display”; in most cases, the illustrations show the monitor.
This camera uses XQD memory cards, referred to throughout this
manual as “memory cards”.
Throughout this manual, smartphones and tablets are referred to as
“smart devices”.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions
in “For Your Safety” (0 xvi).
iii
Table of Contents
Package Contents ......................................................................... ii
For Your Safety ........................................................................... xvi
Notices........................................................................................... xx
Getting to Know the Camera
1
Parts of the Camera ...................................................................... 1
Camera Body ............................................................................................1
The Control Panel ...................................................................................5
The Monitor and Viewfinder...............................................................6
Camera Controls............................................................................ 8
The Viewfinder.........................................................................................8
The Monitor Mode Button...................................................................8
Touch Controls ..................................................................................... 10
The DISP Button..................................................................................... 15
The Sub-Selector.................................................................................. 17
The AF-ON Button .................................................................................. 17
The Command Dials ........................................................................... 17
The G Button.................................................................................... 18
The i Button (i Icon)........................................................................ 21
The Function Buttons (Fn1 and Fn2)............................................... 24
First Steps
27
Attach the Camera Strap ........................................................... 27
Charge the Battery...................................................................... 28
The Battery Charger............................................................................ 28
Charging AC Adapters ....................................................................... 29
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card.................................... 32
Attach a Lens................................................................................ 36
Choose a Language and Set the Clock.................................... 38
iv
Basic Photography and Playback
41
Taking Photographs (b Mode) ................................................ 41
Shooting Movies (b Mode).......................................................45
Basic Playback..............................................................................49
Viewing Movies .................................................................................... 49
Deleting Unwanted Pictures ........................................................... 51
Basic Settings
52
Focus.............................................................................................. 52
Choosing a Focus Mode.................................................................... 52
AF-Area Mode ....................................................................................... 54
The Touch Shutter............................................................................... 59
Manual Focus ........................................................................................ 61
White Balance ..............................................................................63
Silent Photography.....................................................................67
Rating Pictures............................................................................. 68
Protecting Pictures from Deletion ........................................... 69
Shooting Controls
70
The Mode Dial..............................................................................70
P: Programmed Auto .......................................................................... 71
S: Shutter-Priority Auto ...................................................................... 71
A: Aperture-Priority Auto................................................................... 72
M: Manual................................................................................................ 73
User Settings: U1, U2, and U3 Modes............................................... 75
Long Time-Exposures (Mode M) ..................................................... 78
The S (ISO Sensitivity) Button .............................................. 80
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ............................................................ 81
The E (Exposure Compensation) Button ............................... 82
The c/E (Release Mode/Self-Timer) Button......................... 84
The Self-Timer....................................................................................... 87
v
The Sub-Selector..........................................................................89
Focus-Point Selection.........................................................................89
Autoexposure (AE) Lock ....................................................................89
Focus Lock ..............................................................................................89
The i Menu
92
Using the i Menu ........................................................................92
The Photo-Mode i Menu ...........................................................93
Set Picture Control...............................................................................94
White Balance........................................................................................98
Image Quality ..................................................................................... 104
Image Size............................................................................................ 106
Flash Mode .......................................................................................... 107
Metering ............................................................................................... 108
Wi-Fi Connection............................................................................... 109
Active D-Lighting .............................................................................. 110
Release Mode...................................................................................... 111
Vibration Reduction ......................................................................... 112
AF-Area Mode..................................................................................... 113
Focus Mode......................................................................................... 113
The Movie-Mode i Menu........................................................ 114
Set Picture Control............................................................................ 115
White Balance..................................................................................... 115
Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality ............................ 116
Microphone Sensitivity ................................................................... 118
Choose Image Area .......................................................................... 119
Metering ............................................................................................... 120
Wi-Fi Connection............................................................................... 120
Active D-Lighting .............................................................................. 120
Electronic VR ....................................................................................... 120
Vibration Reduction ......................................................................... 121
AF-Area Mode..................................................................................... 121
Focus Mode......................................................................................... 121
vi
More About Playback
122
Viewing Pictures........................................................................122
Full-Frame Playback..........................................................................122
Thumbnail Playback .........................................................................123
Photo Information ....................................................................124
The i Button: Playback ............................................................132
Select to Send/Deselect ..................................................................134
Choose Start/End Point ...................................................................135
Save Current Frame ..........................................................................138
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom...................................139
Deleting Pictures.......................................................................140
During Playback .................................................................................140
The Playback Menu...........................................................................141
Menu Guide
143
Defaults.......................................................................................143
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...........................154
Delete............................................................................................155
Playback Folder .........................................................................155
Playback Display Options ......................................................155
Image Review.............................................................................156
After Delete.................................................................................156
After Burst, Show ......................................................................157
Rotate Tall....................................................................................157
Slide Show...................................................................................158
Rating............................................................................................159
vii
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options .............. 160
Reset Photo Shooting Menu ................................................ 161
Storage Folder........................................................................... 161
File Naming ................................................................................ 165
Choose Image Area ................................................................. 165
Image Quality ............................................................................ 166
Image Size................................................................................... 166
NEF (RAW) Recording ............................................................. 168
ISO Sensitivity Settings .......................................................... 169
White Balance............................................................................ 170
Set Picture Control................................................................... 177
Manage Picture Control......................................................... 179
Color Space ................................................................................ 182
Active D-Lighting ..................................................................... 182
Long Exposure NR.................................................................... 183
High ISO NR ................................................................................ 183
Vignette Control....................................................................... 184
Diffraction Compensation .................................................... 184
Auto Distortion Control ......................................................... 184
Flicker Reduction Shooting .................................................. 185
Metering...................................................................................... 185
Flash Control.............................................................................. 186
Flash Mode ................................................................................. 188
Flash Compensation ............................................................... 189
Focus Mode................................................................................ 189
AF-Area Mode............................................................................ 189
Vibration Reduction ................................................................ 189
Auto Bracketing........................................................................ 190
Multiple Exposure .................................................................... 200
HDR (High Dynamic Range) ................................................. 207
Interval Timer Shooting ......................................................... 212
Time-Lapse Movie.................................................................... 223
Focus Shift Shooting............................................................... 231
Silent Photography ................................................................. 237
viii
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options ...238
Reset Movie Shooting Menu ................................................239
File Naming.................................................................................239
Choose Image Area..................................................................239
Frame Size/Frame Rate...........................................................239
Movie Quality.............................................................................239
Movie File Type .........................................................................239
ISO Sensitivity Settings...........................................................240
White Balance ............................................................................240
Set Picture Control ...................................................................241
Manage Picture Control .........................................................241
Active D-Lighting......................................................................241
High ISO NR ................................................................................241
Vignette Control .......................................................................242
Diffraction Compensation.....................................................242
Auto Distortion Control..........................................................242
Flicker Reduction ......................................................................242
Metering ......................................................................................243
Focus Mode ................................................................................243
AF-Area Mode ............................................................................243
Vibration Reduction.................................................................243
Electronic VR...............................................................................243
Microphone Sensitivity...........................................................244
Attenuator...................................................................................244
Frequency Response ...............................................................245
Wind Noise Reduction ............................................................245
Headphone Volume ................................................................245
Timecode.....................................................................................246
ix
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings............ 247
Reset Custom Settings ........................................................... 250
a: Autofocus.................................................................................... 251
a1: AF-C Priority Selection..................................................... 251
a2: AF-S Priority Selection ..................................................... 251
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On........................................ 252
a4: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection............................... 252
a5: Focus Points Used ............................................................. 253
a6: Store Points by Orientation ........................................... 253
a7: AF Activation....................................................................... 254
a8: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection...................................... 254
a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around.............................................. 255
a10: Focus Point Options....................................................... 255
a11: Low-Light AF .................................................................... 255
a12: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator ...................................... 256
a13: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode ................................. 256
b: Metering/Exposure ................................................................. 257
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl........................................... 257
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation...................................... 257
b3: Center-Weighted Area .................................................... 258
b4: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure........................................ 258
c: Timers/AE Lock.......................................................................... 259
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L ......................................... 259
c2: Self-Timer ............................................................................. 259
c3: Power Off Delay ................................................................. 260
d: Shooting/Display ..................................................................... 261
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed .............................................. 261
d2: Max. Continuous Release............................................... 261
d3: Sync. Release Mode Options......................................... 261
d4: Exposure Delay Mode ..................................................... 261
d5: Shutter Type ....................................................................... 262
d6: Limit Selectable Image Area ......................................... 262
d7: File Number Sequence.................................................... 263
d8: Apply Settings to Live View .......................................... 264
x
d9: Framing Grid Display .......................................................264
d10: Peaking Highlights .........................................................264
d11: View All in Continuous Mode .....................................264
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................265
e1: Flash Sync Speed ...............................................................265
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................266
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash...............................................266
e4: Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control ......................................266
e5: Modeling Flash ...................................................................267
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M) .............................................267
e7: Bracketing Order................................................................268
f: Controls.........................................................................................269
f1: Customize i Menu ...........................................................269
f2: Custom Control Assignment ..........................................271
f3: OK Button ..............................................................................279
f4: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock..........................................281
f5: Customize Command Dials.............................................281
f6: Release Button to Use Dial ..............................................283
f7: Reverse Indicators ..............................................................283
g: Movie ............................................................................................284
g1: Customize i Menu..........................................................284
g2: Custom Control Assignment.........................................285
g3: OK Button.............................................................................290
g4: AF Speed...............................................................................290
g5: AF Tracking Sensitivity ....................................................291
g6: Highlight Display...............................................................292
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup..........................................293
Format Memory Card..............................................................294
Save User Settings....................................................................294
Reset User Settings ..................................................................294
Language.....................................................................................294
Time Zone and Date ................................................................295
Monitor Brightness ..................................................................295
Monitor Color Balance ............................................................296
xi
Viewfinder Brightness ............................................................ 297
Viewfinder Color Balance ...................................................... 297
Control Panel Brightness....................................................... 297
Limit Monitor Mode Selection............................................. 298
Information Display................................................................. 298
AF Fine-Tune.............................................................................. 299
Non-CPU Lens Data ................................................................. 300
Clean Image Sensor................................................................. 300
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ..................................................... 301
Image Comment ...................................................................... 303
Copyright Information ........................................................... 304
Beep Options ............................................................................. 305
Touch Controls.......................................................................... 305
HDMI............................................................................................. 306
Location Data ............................................................................ 306
Wireless Remote (WR) Options ........................................... 307
Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button........................................... 308
Airplane Mode........................................................................... 308
Connect to Smart Device ...................................................... 308
Connect to PC............................................................................ 309
Wireless Transmitter (WT-7) ................................................. 309
Conformity Marking................................................................ 309
Battery Info ................................................................................. 310
Slot Empty Release Lock........................................................ 310
Save/Load Settings.................................................................. 311
Reset All Settings...................................................................... 313
Firmware Version ..................................................................... 313
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .......... 314
NEF (RAW) Processing ............................................................ 317
Trim ............................................................................................... 320
Resize............................................................................................ 321
D-Lighting................................................................................... 323
Red-Eye Correction.................................................................. 323
Straighten ................................................................................... 324
xii
Distortion Control.....................................................................324
Perspective Control .................................................................325
Image Overlay............................................................................326
Trim Movie ..................................................................................329
Side-by-Side Comparison......................................................329
O My Menu/m Recent Settings..............................................331
Connections
336
Connecting to Smart Devices .................................................336
Connecting to Computers .......................................................337
Connecting via USB ..........................................................................337
Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi) ...............................................................341
Connecting to Printers .............................................................342
Printing Pictures One at a Time ....................................................343
Printing Multiple Pictures ...............................................................344
Connecting to HDMI Devices ..................................................345
HDMI Recorders .................................................................................346
On-Camera Flash Photography
349
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote” ..............................................349
Camera-Mounted Flash Units .......................................................349
Remote Flash Photography ...........................................................349
Using an On-Camera Flash ......................................................350
Flash Control Mode...................................................................352
Flash Modes ...............................................................................354
Flash Compensation.................................................................356
FV Lock ........................................................................................357
Flash Info for On-Camera Units ..............................................359
xiii
Remote Flash Photography
362
Using Remote Flash Units ....................................................... 362
Radio AWL.................................................................................. 364
Establishing a Wireless Connection............................................ 364
Adjusting Flash Settings ................................................................. 368
Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit........................................... 374
Optical AWL ............................................................................... 375
Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500..................... 375
Optical/Radio AWL ................................................................... 383
Viewing Flash Info .................................................................... 384
Troubleshooting
387
Problems and Solutions .......................................................... 388
Battery/Display................................................................................... 388
Shooting............................................................................................... 389
Playback................................................................................................ 391
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)................................. 393
Miscellaneous..................................................................................... 393
Indicators and Error Messages............................................... 394
Indicators.............................................................................................. 394
Error Messages ................................................................................... 396
xiv
Technical Notes
398
The Camera Display and Control Panel ................................398
The Monitor: Photo Mode ..............................................................398
The Monitor: Movie Mode ..............................................................403
The Viewfinder: Photo Mode.........................................................404
The Viewfinder: Movie Mode.........................................................406
The Control Panel ..............................................................................407
The Nikon Creative Lighting System.....................................408
Other Accessories......................................................................413
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter......................418
Caring for the Camera ..............................................................420
Storage ..................................................................................................420
Cleaning ................................................................................................420
Image Sensor Cleaning....................................................................421
Manual Cleaning ................................................................................424
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions......................426
Specifications.............................................................................431
NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual.....................446
FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual ........................................455
Approved Memory Cards ........................................................462
Memory Card Capacity.............................................................463
Battery Endurance ....................................................................465
Index ............................................................................................466
xv
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For
Your Safety” in its entirety before using this product.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use this product will read
them.
DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon carries a
high risk of death or severe injury.
WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could
result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could
result in injury or property damage.
WARNING
• Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
• Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal parts
that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other
injury.
• Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing
smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or
power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
• Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with
wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product
while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
• Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such
as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
xvi
• Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the
lens.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
• Do not aim the flash or AF-assist illuminator at the operator of a motor
vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical
attention.
• Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Do not use batteries, chargers, or AC adapters not specifically
designated for use with this product. When using batteries, chargers,
and AC adapters designated for use with this product, do not:
- Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place them
under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame.
- Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC
adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
• Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high
or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
CAUTION
• Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s internal
parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame.
Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could
cause fire.
xvii
• Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless
features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere
with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
• Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will
not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
• Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or
objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
• Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high
temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
• Do not look directly at the AF-assist illuminator.
Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse effects on vision.
• Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories
attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction.
DANGER (Batteries)
• Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries
leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire:
- Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
- Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
- Do not disassemble.
- Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects.
- Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to
powerful physical shocks.
- Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with
hammers.
xviii
• Charge only as indicated.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of
clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
WARNING (Batteries)
• Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
• Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.
The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten, chewed, or
otherwise damaged by animals.
• Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object
should it become wet.
• Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the
batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging
EN-EL15b rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified
period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into
contact with the terminals.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing,
immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
xix
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with • Nikon will not be held liable for any
this product may be reproduced,
damages resulting from the use of
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
this product.
retrieval system, or translated into
• While every effort has been made to
any language in any form, by any
ensure that the information in these
means, without Nikon’s prior written manuals is accurate and complete,
permission.
we would appreciate it were you to
• Nikon reserves the right to change
bring any errors or omissions to the
the appearance and specifications
attention of the Nikon
of the hardware and software
representative in your area (address
described in these manuals at any
provided separately).
time and without prior notice.
xx
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied • Cautions on certain copies and
reproductions
or reproduced
The government has issued cautions
Do not copy or reproduce paper
on copies or reproductions of
money, coins, securities,
government bonds, or local
securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift
government bonds, even if such
certificates, etc.), commuter passes,
copies or reproductions are
or coupon tickets, except when a
stamped “Sample.”
minimum of necessary copies are to
The copying or reproduction of
be provided for business use by a
paper money, coins, or securities
company. Also, do not copy or
which are circulated in a foreign
reproduce passports issued by the
country is prohibited.
government, licenses issued by
Unless the prior permission of the
public agencies and private groups,
government has been obtained, the ID cards, and tickets, such as passes
copying or reproduction of unused
and meal coupons.
postage stamps or post cards issued
• Comply with copyright notices
by the government is prohibited.
Under copyright law, photographs
The copying or reproduction of
or recordings of copyrighted works
stamps issued by the government
made with the camera cannot be
and of certified documents
used without the permission of the
stipulated by law is prohibited.
copyright holder. Exceptions apply
to personal use, but note that even
personal use may be restricted in
the case of photographs or
recordings of exhibits or live
performances.
xxi
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local
authorized Nikon dealer.
D Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
D Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: https://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: https://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
xxii
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the names and
functions of camera controls and displays. You may find it
helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read
through the rest of the manual.
Parts of the Camera
Refer to this section for the names and locations of camera
controls and displays.
Camera Body
6
4
7
5
8
9
1
2
2
10
3
11
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mode dial........................................ 70
Eyelet for camera strap................ 27
Mode dial lock release................. 70
Stereo microphone.....................118
Movie-record button ................... 45
Power switch............................38, 41
Shutter-release button................ 41
E button......................................... 82
13
9
10
11
12
13
14
12
S button .................................... 80
Focal plane mark (E) ................. 62
Main command dial............ 17, 281
Speaker
Control panel..................5, 297, 398
Accessory shoe (for optional flash
unit)..................................... 408, 416
Getting to Know the Camera
1
The Camera Body (Continued)
1
2
3
7
8
9
4
10
5
11
12
6
13
1 Image sensor ............................... 421
2 Monitor mode button ...........8, 298
3 AF-assist illuminator ............43, 256
Red-eye reduction lamp... 107, 354
Self-timer lamp ..............................87
4 Cover for accessory terminal
and USB and HDMI
connectors
5 Cover for headphone and
microphone connectors
Lens mounting mark ....................36
Headphone connector.............. 245
CHARGE lamp.................................29
USB connector .......... 337, 413, 417
HDMI connector ....... 345, 413, 417
Accessory terminal..................... 413
Connector for external
microphone ............................... 413
13 Body cap.................................36, 413
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
D Do Not Touch the Image Sensor
Under no circumstances should you exert
pressure on the image sensor, poke it with
cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower. These actions could
scratch or otherwise damage the sensor. For
information on cleaning the image sensor,
see “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 421).
2
Getting to Know the Camera
Image sensor
1
2
3
7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4
5
6
20 19 18 17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Eye sensor..........................................8
Viewfinder .........................................8
Viewfinder eyepiece...................415
K button........................................ 49
O button ......................................... 51
Monitor......................................10, 59
Diopter adjustment control ..........8
DISP button............................ 15, 124
Photo/movie selector ............41, 45
AF-ON button .................................. 17
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Sub-selector.............................17, 89
i button....................................21, 92
Memory card slot cover .............. 32
Memory card access lamp....44, 86
J button ........................................ 18
Multi selector................................. 18
G button........................... 18, 143
c (E) button................................ 84
W (Q) button ...................... 20, 123
X button ........................61, 122, 139
D The Monitor
The angle of the monitor can be adjusted as shown.
Getting to Know the Camera
3
The Camera Body (Continued)
6
7
1
8
2
3
9
4
10
5
1
2
3
4
5
Sub-command dial ..............17, 281 6
Fn1 button ..............24, 63, 271, 285 7
Fn2 button ..............24, 52, 271, 285 8
Battery-chamber cover latch......32 9
Battery-chamber cover ................32 10
Lens mount.....................................36
Lens release button ......................37
CPU contacts
Tripod socket ..................................78
Power connector cover ............. 418
D Product Serial Number
The serial number for this product can be
found by opening the monitor.
4
Getting to Know the Camera
The Control Panel
The control panel lights when the camera is on. At default
settings, the following indicators are displayed; for a full list of
the indicators that appear in the control panel, see “The Control
Panel” (0 407).
1
2
3
7
4
6
1
2
3
4
Shutter speed ..........................71, 73
Aperture.......................................... 72
Battery indicator ........................... 34
“k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) .................................... 34
5
5 Number of exposures
remaining ............................ 34, 463
6 Release mode ................................ 84
7 ISO sensitivity ................................ 80
Getting to Know the Camera
5
The Monitor and Viewfinder
At default settings, the following
indicators appear in the monitor and
viewfinder in photo mode; for a full list of
indicators, see “The Camera Display and
Control Panel” (0 398).
Monitor
Viewfinder
21 25 23
1
3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10 9
23456 7 89
10
11
12
25
24
23
22
21
2
13
14
20 19 18 17 16 15
22 20 1 19 18 13 17 16 15 14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
6
Shooting mode ..............................70
Focus point...............................43, 54
Release mode ........................84, 111
Focus mode...................52, 189, 243
AF-area mode...............54, 189, 243
Active D-Lighting ..... 110, 182, 241
Picture Control .............94, 177, 241
White balance .......63, 98, 170, 240
Image area ................. 119, 165, 239
Image size............................ 106, 166
Image quality ..................... 104, 166
i icon.......................................13, 21
Getting to Know the Camera
13 Exposure indicator ........................74
Exposure compensation
display ............................................82
14 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) .....................................34
15 Number of exposures
remaining .............................34, 463
16 ISO sensitivity.................................80
17 ISO sensitivity indicator ...............80
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .....81
18
19
20
21
22
Aperture.......................................... 72 23 Vibration reduction
indicator............................. 112, 189
Shutter speed ..........................71, 73
Metering .....................108, 185, 243 24 Touch shooting .......................10, 59
Battery indicator ........................... 34 25 “Clock not set” indicator ............. 40
Shutter type .................................262
The following items appear in movie
mode.
Monitor
Viewfinder
1
34
1
2
3
4
10
9
8
7
10
6
6
5
7
1 Recording indicator...................... 45
Recording disabled ...................... 46
2 Time remaining ............................. 45
3 Frame size and rate/
image quality ....................116, 239
4 File name ......................................239
89
5 2
5 Release mode
(still photography)...................... 84
6 Subject tracking............................ 58
7 Sound level .................................. 118
8 Microphone sensitivity..... 118, 244
9 Frequency response................... 245
10 AF-area brackets ........................... 54
Getting to Know the Camera
7
Camera Controls
This section outlines how to use various camera controls and
displays.
The Viewfinder
Placing your eye to the viewfinder
activates the eye sensor, switching the
display from the monitor to the
viewfinder (note that the eye sensor will
also respond to other objects, such as
your fingers). The viewfinder can be used
for menus and playback if desired.
Eye sensor
The Monitor Mode Button
Press the monitor mode button to cycle
between viewfinder and monitor
displays.
D The Diopter Adjustment Control
To focus the viewfinder, lift and rotate the
diopter adjustment control, being careful
not to put your fingers or fingernails in your
eye. Push the control back in once focus is
adjusted to your satisfaction.
A Extended Use
When using the viewfinder for extended periods, you can adjust
viewfinder brightness and hue for ease of viewing by selecting Off for
Custom Setting d8 (Apply settings to live view).
A Monitor Mode
You can limit the choice of monitor modes available using the Limit
monitor mode selection option in the setup menu.
8
Getting to Know the Camera
Press the monitor mode button to cycle through the displays as
follows.
Automatic display switch: The display switches from the
monitor to the viewfinder when you place your eye
to the viewfinder, and from the viewfinder to the
monitor when you take your eye away.
Viewfinder only: The viewfinder is used for shooting,
menus, and playback; the monitor remains blank.
Monitor only: The monitor is used for shooting, menus,
and playback; the viewfinder display will remain
blank even if you put your eye to the viewfinder.
Prioritize viewfinder: The camera functions in a manner
similar to existing digital SLR cameras. Placing your
eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder on and
taking your eye away turns the viewfinder off. In
photo mode, the monitor remains blank, while in
movie mode, during playback, or while menus are
displayed, the monitor will turn on when you take
your eye away from the viewfinder.
Getting to Know the Camera
9
Touch Controls
The touch-sensitive monitor can be used
to adjust camera settings, focus and
release the shutter, view photos and
movies, enter text, and navigate the
menus. Touch controls are not available
while the viewfinder is in use.
❚❚ Focusing and Releasing the Shutter
Touch the monitor to focus on the
selected point (touch AF). In photo
mode, the shutter will be released when
you lift your finger from the display
(touch shutter).
Touch AF settings can be adjusted by
tapping the W icon (0 59).
10 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚ Adjusting Settings
Tap highlighted settings in the display
and choose the desired option by
tapping icons or sliders. Tap Z or press
J to select the chosen option and
return to the previous display.
❚❚ Playback
Flick left or right to view other pictures
during full-frame playback.
In full-frame view, touching the bottom
of the display brings up a frameadvance bar. Slide your finger left or
right over the bar to scroll rapidly to
other pictures.
Frame advance bar
Getting to Know the Camera 11
Use stretch and pinch gestures to zoom
in and out and slide to scroll. You can
also give the display two quick taps to
zoom in from full-frame playback or
cancel zoom.
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use a
pinch gesture in full-frame playback. Use
pinch and stretch to choose the number
of images displayed from 4, 9, and 72
frames.
❚❚ Movie Playback
Tap the on-screen guide to start movie
playback (movies are indicated by a 1
icon). Tap the display to pause or resume,
or tap Z to exit to full-frame playback.
Guide
12 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚ The i Menu
Tap the i icon to display the i menu
during shooting (0 21, 92).
Tap items to view options.
❚❚ Text Entry
When a keyboard is displayed, you can
enter text by tapping the keys (to cycle
through the upper- and lower-case and
symbol keyboards, tap the keyboard
selection button) or move the cursor by
tapping in the text display area.
Text display area
Keyboard
area
Keyboard
selection
Getting to Know the Camera 13
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Slide up or down to scroll.
Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
Tap menu items to display options and
tap icons or sliders to change.
To exit without changing settings, tap Z.
D The Touch Screen
The touch screen responds to static electricity and may not respond
when covered with third-party protective films, when touched with
fingernails or gloved hands, or when touched simultaneously in
multiple locations. Do not use excessive force or touch the screen with
sharp objects.
A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls
option in the setup menu (0 305).
14 Getting to Know the Camera
The DISP Button
Use the DISP button to view or hide
indicators in the monitor or viewfinder.
❚❚ Photo Mode
In photo mode, pressing the DISP button cycles the display as
follows:
Indicators on
Simplified display
Histogram 1
Flash info 2, 3
Information display 2
Virtual horizon
1 Not displayed when Off is selected for Custom Setting d8 (Apply
settings to live view) or On is selected for Overlay shooting in
multiple exposure mode.
2 Not displayed in the viewfinder.
3 Displayed when an optional SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash
unit is mounted on the accessory shoe or a WR-R10 wireless remote
controller commands a flash unit via radio flash control.
Getting to Know the Camera 15
❚❚ Movie Mode
In movie mode, pressing the DISP button cycles the display as
follows:
Indicators on
Simplified display
Virtual horizon
Histogram
16 Getting to Know the Camera
The Sub-Selector
Use the sub-selector as a joystick to
select the focus point, or press the center
of the sub-selector to lock focus and
exposure (0 89, 90).
The AF-ON Button
In autofocus mode, the AF-ON button can
be used to focus.
The Command Dials
Use the command dials to adjust shutter
speed or aperture or in combination
with other buttons to change camera
settings.
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Getting to Know the Camera 17
The G Button
Press the G button to view the menus.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D: Playback menu .................... 154
C: Photo shooting menu........ 160
1: Movie shooting menu ........ 238
A: Custom Settings menu....... 247
B: Setup menu ............................ 293
N: Retouch menu...................... 314
O/m: My Menu or
recent settings (defaults to
My Menu) ................................... 331
8 d: Help icon ...................................20
9 Current settings .......................... 143
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
❚❚ Using the Menus
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J
button.
1: Move cursor up
J: Select highlighted
item
4: Cancel and return to
previous menu
2: Select highlighted item
or display sub-menu
3: Move cursor down
18 Getting to Know the Camera
1 Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the
icon for the current menu.
2 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
3 Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the
cursor in the selected
menu.
4 Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item (items that are
displayed in gray are not
currently available and
cannot be selected).
Getting to Know the Camera 19
5 Display options.
Press 2 to display options
for the selected menu
item.
6 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
an option (options that are
displayed in gray are not
currently available and
cannot be selected).
7 Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit
without making a selection, press the G button.
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode,
press the shutter-release button halfway.
You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (0 14).
A The d (Help) Icon
If a d icon appears at the bottom left corner of the display, you can
view a description of the currently selected option or menu by
pressing the W (Q) button. Press 1 or 3 to scroll the text, or press
W (Q) again to return to the menus.
20 Getting to Know the Camera
The i Button (i Icon)
For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button
or tap the i icon in the display.
or
Tap the desired item or highlight items
and press J to view options. You can
also adjust settings by highlighting
items and rotating the command dials.
The items displayed in photo mode
(0 93) differ from those displayed in
movie mode (0 114).
A The Playback i Menu
Pressing the i button during playback
displays a context-sensitive menu of
frequently-used playback options.
Getting to Know the Camera 21
❚❚ Customizing the i Menu
The items displayed in the photo-mode i menu can be chosen
using Custom Setting f1 (Customize i menu).
1 Select Custom Setting f1.
In the Custom Settings menu,
highlight Custom Setting f1
(Customize i menu) and press J
(for information on using the menus,
see “The G Button”, 0 18).
2 Choose a position.
Highlight a position in the menu you
want to edit and press J.
3 Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J to
assign it to the selected position and
return to the menu displayed in Step
2. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as desired.
4 Exit.
Press the G button to save changes and exit.
22 Getting to Know the Camera
A Options That Can Be Assigned to the i Menu
The following options can be assigned to the i menu for photo mode:
• Choose image area • Flash compensation • Shutter type
• Apply settings to live
• Image quality
• Focus mode
view
• Image size
• AF-area mode
• Exposure
• Vibration reduction • Split-screen display
• Auto bracketing
zoom
compensation
• Multiple exposure
• Peaking highlights
• ISO sensitivity
• HDR (high dynamic • Monitor/viewfinder
settings
brightness
range)
• White balance
• Set Picture Control
• Silent photography • Bluetooth
connection
• Color space
• Release mode
• Wi-Fi connection
• Active D-Lighting
• Custom control
assignment
• Long exposure NR
• High ISO NR
• Exposure delay
mode
• Metering
• Flash mode
The movie-mode i menu can be customized using Custom Setting g1
(Customize i menu); the options available differ from those for
photo mode.
Getting to Know the Camera 23
The Function Buttons (Fn1 and Fn2)
The Fn1 and Fn2 buttons can also be used
Fn1 button
for quick access to selected settings
during shooting. The settings assigned
to these buttons can be chosen using
Custom Setting f2 (Custom control
assignment) and the selected setting
adjusted either by pressing the button or
Fn2 button
by pressing the button and rotating the
command dials. At default settings, the
Fn1 button is used for white balance and the Fn2 button to select
focus and AF-area modes.
❚❚ Customizing the Function Buttons
The function performed by the function buttons in photo mode
are chosen using Custom Setting f2 (Custom control
assignment).
1 Select Custom Setting f2.
In the Custom Settings menu,
highlight Custom Setting f2 (Custom
control assignment) and press J
(for information on using the menus,
see “The G Button”, 0 18).
24 Getting to Know the Camera
2 Choose a button.
Highlight the option for the desired
button and press J. Select Fn1
button to choose the role played by
the Fn1 button, Fn2 button to choose
the role played by the Fn2 button.
3 Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J to
assign it to the selected button and
return to the menu displayed in Step
2. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to choose the
role played by the remaining button.
4 Exit.
Press the G button to save changes and exit.
Getting to Know the Camera 25
A Roles That Can Be Assigned to the Function Buttons
The following roles can be assigned to the function buttons in photo
mode:
• Flash mode/
• AF-ON
• Sync. release
selection
compensation
• AF lock only
• Focus mode/AF-area
• + NEF (RAW)
• AE lock (Hold)
• Framing grid display mode
• AE lock (Reset on
• Auto bracketing
• Zoom on/off
release)
• Multiple exposure
• MY MENU
• AE lock only
• HDR (high dynamic
• Access top item in
• AE/AF lock
range)
• FV lock
MY MENU
• Playback
• Exposure delay
• c Disable/enable
mode
• Preview
• Protect
• Choose image area • Shutter spd &
• Matrix metering
aperture lock
• Image quality/size
• Center-weighted
• Peaking highlights
• White balance
metering
• Rating
• Set Picture Control
• Spot metering
• Choose non-CPU
• Highlight-weighted • Active D-Lighting
lens number
• Metering
metering
• None
• Bracketing burst
The roles played by the function buttons in movie mode can be chosen
using Custom Setting g2 (Custom control assignment); the options
available differ from those for photo mode.
26 Getting to Know the Camera
First Steps
Complete the steps in this chapter before taking pictures for the
first time.
Attach the Camera Strap
A strap is supplied with the camera; additional straps are
available separately. Attach the strap securely to the camera
eyelets.
First Steps 27
Charge the Battery
The battery can be charged using the supplied battery charger
or an EH-7P charging AC adapter (an EH-7P is supplied with the
Z 7, and can be purchased separately for the Z 6).
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For Your Safety” (0 xvi)
and “Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions” (0 426).
The Battery Charger
Insert the supplied EN-EL15b battery and plug the charger in.
Depending on the country or region, the charger comes with
either an AC wall adapter or a power cable.
• AC wall adapter: Insert the AC wall adapter into the charger AC
inlet (q). Slide the AC wall adapter latch as shown (w) and
rotate the adapter 90 ° to fix it in place (e). Insert the battery
and plug the charger in.
AC wall adapter latch
• Power cable: After connecting the power cable with the plug in
the orientation shown, insert the battery and plug the cable in.
28 First Steps
The CHARGE lamp will flash while the battery charges. An
exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and
35 minutes.
Battery charging
Charging complete
Charging AC Adapters
When inserted in the camera, EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion
batteries will charge while the camera is connected to an EH-7P
charging AC adapter (the EH-7P cannot be used to charge
EN-EL15a and EN-EL15 batteries; use the supplied MH-25a
battery charger instead). An exhausted battery will fully charge
in about two hours and 35 minutes. Note that in countries or
regions where required, charging AC adapters are supplied with
a plug adapter attached; the shape of the plug adapter varies
with the country of sale.
1 Insert the EN-EL15b into the camera
(0 32).
First Steps 29
2 After confirming that the camera is off, connect the
charging AC adapter and plug the adapter in. Insert the
plug or plug adapter straight into the socket rather than at
an angle, and observe the same precaution when
unplugging the charging AC adapter.
CHARGE lamp
Outlet
EH-7P charging
AC adapter
The camera CHARGE lamp lights amber while charging is in
progress and turns off when charging is complete. Note that
although the camera can be used while connected, the
battery will not charge and the camera will not draw power
from the charging AC adapter while the camera is on.
3 Unplug and disconnect the charging AC adapter when
charging is complete.
30 First Steps
D The CHARGE Lamp
If the battery cannot be charged using the charging AC adapter, for
example because the battery is not compatible or the temperature of
the camera is elevated, the CHARGE lamp will flash rapidly for about 30
seconds and then turn off. If the CHARGE lamp is off and you did not
observe the battery charging, turn the camera on and check the
battery level.
First Steps 31
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards,
confirm that the camera power switch is in the OFF position.
Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to
keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch
locks the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.
Battery latch
64GB
Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it
straight into the slot until it clicks into place.
32 First Steps
D Removing the Battery
To remove the battery, turn the camera off
and open the battery-chamber cover. Press
the battery latch in the direction shown by
the arrow to release the battery and then
remove the battery by hand.
D Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card
access lamp is off, turn the camera off, open
the memory card slot cover, and press the
card in to eject it (q). The card can then be
removed by hand (w).
First Steps 33
Battery Level
The battery level is shown in the shooting display and control
panel while the camera is on.
Monitor
Viewfinder
Control panel
The battery level display changes as the battery level diminishes,
from L through K, J, I, and finally, H. When the
battery level falls to H, suspend shooting and charge the
battery or ready a spare battery. When the battery is exhausted,
the H icon will flash; charge the battery or insert a fullycharged spare battery.
Number of Exposures Remaining
When the camera is on, the shooting display and control panel
show the number of photographs that can be taken at current
settings (values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest
hundred; e.g., values between 1400 and 1499 are shown as
1.4 k).
Monitor
34 First Steps
Viewfinder
Control panel
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other
device. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of
data or in damage to the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct
sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
D No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, a “no memory card” indicator will appear
in the shooting display and [–E–] will appear in both the control panel
and the shooting display.
First Steps 35
Attach a Lens
The camera can be used with Z mount lenses. Before attaching
or removing lenses, confirm that the camera power switch is in
the OFF position. Be careful to prevent dust from entering the
camera when the lens or body cap is removed, and be sure to
remove the lens cap before taking pictures. The lens generally
used in this manual for illustrative purposes is a NIKKOR Z 24–
70mm f/4 S.
Remove the
camera body cap
Remove the rear lens cap
Mounting mark (camera)
Align the mounting
marks
G
Do not touch
the image
sensor or lens
contacts.
Mounting mark (lens)
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place
36 First Steps
D F Mount Lenses
Be sure to attach the FTZ mount adapter (supplied or available
separately, 0 455) before using F mount lenses. Attempting to attach
F mount lenses directly to the camera could damage the lens or image
sensor.
D Detaching Lenses
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens,
press and hold the lens release button (q)
while turning the lens clockwise (w). After
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and
camera body cap.
First Steps 37
Choose a Language and Set the Clock
The language option in the setup menu is automatically
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a
language and set the camera clock.
1 Turn the camera on.
Rotate the power switch to ON.
2 Select Language in the setup menu.
Press the G button to display the
camera menus, then highlight
Language in the setup menu and
press 2 (for information on using
menus, see “The G Button”, 0 18).
3 Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language and press J
(the languages available vary with the country or region in
which the camera was originally purchased).
38 First Steps
4 Select Time zone and date.
Highlight Time zone and date and
press 2.
5 Choose a time zone.
Select Time zone and choose your
current time zone (the display shows
selected cities in the chosen zone and
the difference between the time in
the chosen zone and UTC). Press J to
save changes and return to the time zone and date menu.
6 Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Select Daylight saving time, then
highlight On or Off and press J.
Selecting On advances the clock by
one hour.
7 Set the clock.
Select Date and time and use the
multi selector to set the clock. Press J
when the clock is set to the current
date and time (note that the camera
uses a 24-hour clock).
First Steps 39
8 Choose a date format.
To choose the order in which the year,
month, and day are displayed, select
Date format, then highlight the
desired option and press J.
9 Exit to shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to
shooting mode.
D The t (“Clock Not Set”) Icon
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is
installed. Two days of charging will power the clock for about a month.
If a t icon flashes in the display, the clock has been reset and the date
and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct. Use the
Time zone and date > Date and time option in the setup menu to set
the clock to the correct time and date (0 295).
A SnapBridge
Use the SnapBridge app to synchronize the camera clock with the
clock on a smartphone or tablet (smart device). See SnapBridge online help for details.
40 First Steps
Basic Photography and Playback
This chapter explains the basics of taking and viewing photos.
Taking Photographs (b Mode)
Follow the steps below to take photographs in b (auto) mode,
an automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of
settings are controlled by the camera in response to shooting
conditions.
1 Turn the camera on.
The monitor and control panel will
light.
2 Select photo mode.
Rotate the photo/movie
selector to C.
D Lenses with Retractable Barrels
Lenses with retractable barrels must be
extended before use. Rotate the lens zoom
ring as shown until the lens clicks into the
extended position.
Basic Photography and Playback 41
3 Select b mode.
Mode dial
Pressing the mode dial
lock release on top of the
camera, rotate the mode
dial to b.
Mode dial lock release
4 Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left. Bring your elbows in against the
sides of your chest.
Framing photos in the viewfinder
Landscape (wide) orientation
Portrait (tall) orientation
Framing photos in the monitor
Landscape (wide) orientation
42 Basic Photography and Playback
Portrait (tall) orientation
5 Frame the photograph.
Frame the shot and use the subselector or multi selector to position
the focus point over your subject.
Focus point
6 Focus.
To focus, press the shutter-release
button halfway or press the AF-ON
button (the AF-assist illuminator may
light if the subject is poorly lit). If AF-S
is selected for focus mode, the focus
point will be displayed in green if the
camera is able to focus; if the camera
is unable to focus, the focus point will
flash red.
D The AF-Assist Illuminator
Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
Basic Photography and Playback 43
7 Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way down to
take the photograph (you can also
take a photograph by touching the
monitor: touch your subject to focus
and lift your finger to release the
shutter). The memory card access
lamp will light while the photo is
recorded to the memory card. Do not
eject the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source until the
lamp has gone out and recording is
complete.
Memory card
access lamp
D The Standby Timer
If no operations are performed for about
30 seconds, the display will dim for a few
seconds before the monitor, viewfinder, and
control panel turn off to reduce the drain on
the battery. Press the shutter-release button
halfway to reactivate the display. The length
of time before the standby timer expires
automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c3 (Power off
delay) > Standby timer.
44 Basic Photography and Playback
Shooting Movies (b Mode)
b (auto) mode can also be used for simple, “point-and-shoot”
movie recording.
1 Turn the camera on.
The monitor and control panel will
light.
2 Select movie mode.
Rotate the photo/movie
selector to 1. Note that
optional flash units cannot
be used when the camera
is in movie mode.
3 Select b mode.
Mode dial
Pressing the mode dial
lock release on top of the
camera, rotate the mode
dial to b.
Mode dial lock release
Basic Photography and Playback 45
4 Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to
start recording. While recording is in
progress, the camera will display a
recording indicator and the time
remaining. The camera can be
refocused at any time during
recording by pressing the AF-ON
button or tapping your subject in the
display. Sound is recorded via the
built-in microphone; do not cover
the microphone during recording.
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
5 End recording.
Press the movie-record button again
to end recording. The memory card
access lamp will light while the
camera finishes saving the movie to
the memory card. Do not eject the
memory card or remove or disconnect
the power source until the lamp has
gone out and recording is complete.
Memory card
access lamp
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon indicates that movies cannot be recorded.
46 Basic Photography and Playback
In movie mode, photos can be taken
without interrupting recording by
pressing the shutter-release button all
the way down. A C icon will flash in the
display when a photo is taken.
D Taking Photos in Movie Mode
Note that photos can be taken even when the subject is not in focus.
Photos are recorded in finem-quality JPEG format at the dimensions
currently selected for movie frame size. In continuous release modes,
the frame advance rate while recording is paused varies with the
option selected for Frame size/frame rate, but only one photo will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed while recording
is in progress. Up to 50 photographs can be taken with each movie.
D During Shooting
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the display and in
photos and movies shot under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium
lamps or with subjects that are in motion, particularly if the camera is
panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed
through the frame. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright
spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some
areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light
sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other
bright, momentary light source, while noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in
on the view through the lens. Flicker may occur when power aperture
is used during movie recording.
Avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the
camera’s internal circuitry.
Basic Photography and Playback 47
D Recording Movies
Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached
or the memory card fills or if the lens is removed, another mode is
selected, or the photo/movie selector is rotated to C. Note that the
built-in microphone may record sounds made by the camera or lens
during vibration reduction, autofocus, or changes to aperture.
48 Basic Photography and Playback
Basic Playback
Photographs and movies can be viewed on the camera.
1 Press the K button.
A picture will appear in the display.
2 View additional pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional
pictures. When pictures are displayed
in the monitor, you can view other
pictures by flicking a finger left or
right over the display. To end
playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutterrelease button halfway.
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon. Tap the a icon in the display
or press J to start playback; your current position is shown on
the movie progress bar.
1 icon
Length
a icon
Current position/total length
Movie Volume
progress
bar
Guide
Basic Photography and Playback 49
The following operations can be performed:
Operation
Pause
Play
Rewind/advance
Start slow-motion
playback
Skip 10 s
Skip to last or first
frame
Adjust volume
Trim movie
Exit
Return to shooting
mode
Description
Press 3 to pause playback.
Press J to resume playback when playback is paused
or during rewind/advance.
Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance. Speed increases
with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep the
control pressed to skip to the beginning or end of the
movie (the first frame is indicated by a h in the top
right corner of the display, the last frame by a i). If
playback is paused, the movie rewinds or advances
one frame at a time; keep the control pressed for
continuous rewind or advance.
Press 3 while the movie is paused to start slowmotion playback.
Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead
or back 10 s.
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to the last or first
frame.
Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.
To view movie editing options, pause playback and
press the i button.
Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to
shooting mode.
50 Basic Photography and Playback
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Press the O button to delete the current picture. Note that
pictures cannot be recovered once deleted.
1 Display a picture you wish to delete.
Display a photo or movie you wish to
delete as described in “Basic
Playback” (0 49).
2 Delete the picture.
Press the O button. A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; press the O
button again to delete the picture
and return to playback. To exit
without deleting the picture, press
K.
A Delete
To delete selected pictures, all pictures taken on selected dates, or all
pictures in a chosen location on the memory card, use the Delete
option in the playback menu.
Basic Photography and Playback 51
Basic Settings
This chapter covers basic shooting and playback settings.
Focus
Focus can be adjusted automatically, manually, or using touch
controls. How the camera focuses is governed by your choice of
focus mode and AF-area mode.
Choosing a Focus Mode
The focus mode controls how the
camera focuses. The focus mode can be
selected using the Focus mode items in
the i menu and the photo and movie
shooting menus (0 113, 189, 243).
At default settings, the focus mode can
also be selected by holding the Fn2 button and rotating the main
command dial (0 24).
Option
AF-S Single AF
52 Basic Settings
Description
For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus,
the focus point will turn from red to green; focus will
lock while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point
will flash red. At default settings, the shutter can only
be released if the camera is able to focus (focus
priority).
Option
AF-C
AF-F
MF
Description
For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if
Continuous the subject moves, the camera will predict the final
distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary.
AF
At default settings, the shutter can be released
whether or not the subject is in focus (release priority).
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to
subject movement or changes in composition. When
Full-time
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the
AF
focus point will turn from red to green and focus will
lock. This option is only available in movie mode.
Manual
Focus manually (0 61). The shutter can be released
focus
whether or not the subject is in focus.
D Autofocus
The display may brighten or darken while the camera focuses and the
focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is
unable to focus. The camera may be unable to focus using autofocus in
the following situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light
source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
D Turning the Camera Off
The focus position may change if you turn the camera off and then on
again after focusing.
A Low-Light AF
For improved focus when lighting is poor, select AF-S and choose On for
Custom Setting a11 (Low-light AF).
Basic Settings 53
AF-Area Mode
The focus point can be positioned using
the sub-selector (0 89) or multi-selector.
AF-area mode controls how the camera
selects the focus-point for autofocus.
The default setting is Single-point AF,
but other options can be selected using
the AF-area mode items in the i menu and the photo and
movie shooting menus (0 113, 189, 243).
At default settings, AF-area mode can also be selected by
holding the Fn2 button and rotating the sub-command dial
(0 24).
Option
3 Pinpoint AF
d Single-point AF
54 Basic Settings
Description
Recommended for shots involving static subjects,
such as buildings, in-studio product
photography, or close-ups. Pinpoint AF is used for
pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame.
This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus
mode. Focusing may be slower than with singlepoint AF.
The camera focuses on a point selected by the
user. Use with stationary subjects.
Option
e
f
g
h
Description
The camera focuses on a point selected by the
user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected
point, the camera will focus based on information
from surrounding focus points. Use for
Dynamic-area AF photographs of athletes and other active subjects
that are hard to frame using single-point AF. This
option is only available when photo mode is
selected and Continuous AF is chosen for Focus
mode.
As for Single-point AF, except the camera
focuses on a wider area, the focus areas for WideWide-area AF (S) area AF (L) being larger than those for Widearea AF (S). Use for snapshots or photos of
moving subjects that are hard to frame using
single-point AF, or in movie mode for smooth
focus during panning and tilting shots or when
filming moving subjects. If the selected focus area
Wide-area AF (L) contains subjects at different distances from the
camera, the camera will assign priority to the
closest subject.
The camera automatically detects the subject and
selects the focus area. Use on occasions when you
don’t have time to select the focus point yourself,
for portraits, or for snapshots and other spur-ofthe-moment photos. The camera gives priority to
portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected,
an amber border indicating the focus point will
Auto-area AF
appear around the subject’s face or, if the camera
detects the subject’s eyes, one or the other of
their eyes (face/eye-detection AF). This frees you
to concentrate on composition and your subject’s
expression when photographing active portrait
subjects (0 57). Subject tracking (0 58) can be
activated by pressing the J button.
Basic Settings 55
A s: The Center Focus Point
In all AF-area modes except Auto-area AF, a dot appears in the focus
point when it is in the center of the frame.
A Quick Focus-Point Selection
For quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for
Custom Setting a5 (Focus points used) to use only a quarter of the
available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area
AF (L) does not change). If you prefer to use the sub-selector for focuspoint selection, you can choose Select center focus point for Custom
Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) > Sub-selector center to
allow the center of the sub-selector to be used to quickly select the
center focus point.
56 Basic Settings
❚❚ Face/Eye-Detection AF
When photographing portrait subjects
with Auto-area AF, use Custom Setting
a4 (Auto-area AF face/eye detection)
to choose whether the camera detects
both faces and eyes (face/eye-detection
AF) or only faces (face-detection AF). If
Face and eye detection on is selected
and a portrait subject is detected, an
amber border indicating the focus point
will appear around the subject’s face or,
if the camera detects the subject’s eyes,
Focus point
one or the other of their eyes (face/eyedetection AF). Faces detected when Face
detection on is selected are similarly indicated by an amber
border. If AF-S is selected for focus mode, the focus point will turn
green when the camera focuses.
If more than one portrait subject or more than one eye is
detected, e and f icons will appear on the focus point, and you
will be able to position the focus point over a different face or
eye by pressing 4 or 2. If the subject looks away after their face
is detected, the focus point will move to track their motion.
During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for
focus by pressing J.
D Face/Eye-Detection AF
Eye detection is not available in movie mode. Eye and face detection
may not perform as expected if:
• the subject’s face occupies a very large or very small proportion of
the frame,
• the subject’s face is lit too brightly or too poorly,
• the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses,
• the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or
• the subject moves excessively during shooting.
Basic Settings 57
❚❚ Subject Tracking
When Auto-area AF is selected for AFarea mode, pressing J enables focus
tracking. The focus point will change to a
targeting reticule; position the reticule
over the target and either press J again
or press the AF-ON button to start
tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it
moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, focus
will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press J a third
time. To exit subject-tracking mode, press the W (Q) button.
D Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave
the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color,
or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar
in color or brightness to the background.
58 Basic Settings
The Touch Shutter
Touch controls can be used to focus and
release the shutter. Touch the display to
focus and lift your finger to release the
shutter.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to
choose the operation performed by
tapping the display in shooting mode.
Choose from the following options:
• W: Touch the display to position the
focus point and focus (if a face is
detected, the camera will focus on the face closest to the
selected point). Focus locks while your finger remains on the
display; lift your finger to release the shutter. Available only in
photo mode.
• V: As above, except that lifting your finger from the display
does not release the shutter. If auto-area AF is selected for AFarea mode, the camera will track the selected subject as it
moves through the frame; to switch to a different subject, tap it
in the display.
• X: Touch shutter disabled.
Basic Settings 59
D Taking Pictures Using Touch Shooting Options
The shutter-release button can be used to focus and take pictures even
when the W icon is displayed to show that touch shooting options are
active. Touch shooting options can only be used to take pictures one at
a time and cannot be used for manual focus or to take photographs
during movie recording; for burst photography or to take photos
during movie recording, use the shutter-release button.
The camera may fail to focus on faces or eyes selected using touch
controls when eye detection is enabled, in which case it may be
necessary to use the multi selector.
In self-timer mode, focus locks on the selected subject when you touch
the monitor and the number of shots currently selected in self-timer
mode will be taken starting about 10 seconds after you lift your finger
from the display.
60 Basic Settings
Manual Focus
Manual focus can be used when
autofocus does not produce the desired
results. Position the focus point over
your subject and rotate the focus or
control ring until the subject is in focus.
For greater precision, press the X button
to zoom in on the view through the lens.
When the subject is in focus, the focus
point will light green and the in-focus
indicator (I) will appear in the display.
In-focus
indicator
I
F
H
F H
(flashes)
Focus distance indicator
Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is between camera
and subject.
Focus point is behind subject.
In-focus indicator
Camera unable to determine
whether subject is in focus.
When using manual focus with subjects not suited to autofocus,
note that the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the
subject is not in focus. Zoom in on the view through the lens and
check focus. Use of a tripod is recommended when the camera is
having trouble focusing.
Basic Settings 61
D Lenses with Focus-Mode Selection
Manual focus can be selected using the controls on the lens.
D Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between
your subject and the camera, measure
from the focal plane mark (E) on the
camera body. The distance between the
lens mounting flange and the focal
plane is 16 mm (0.63 in.).
16 mm
Focal plane mark
A Focus Peaking
If focus peaking is enabled using Custom
Setting d10 (Peaking highlights), objects
that are in focus will be indicated by colored
outlines in manual focus mode. Note that
peaking highlights may not be displayed if
the camera is unable to detect outlines, in
which case focus can be checked using the
view through the lens in the display.
62 Basic Settings
Area in focus
White Balance
White balance ensures that white objects appear white,
regardless of the color of the light source. The default setting
(j) is recommended with most light sources. If the desired
results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose
another option as described below.
White balance can be selected using the
White balance items in the i menu and
the photo and movie shooting menus
(0 98, 170, 240).
At default settings, white balance can also be selected by
holding the Fn1 button and rotating the main command dial
(0 24).
When 4 (Auto), I (Fluorescent), K (Choose color
temperature), or L (Preset manual) is selected, you can
choose a sub-option by holding the Fn1 button and rotating the
sub-command dial.
Basic Settings 63
Option
K*
4 Auto
Keep white (reduce warm
colors)
Keep overall atmosphere
3500–
8000
Keep warm lighting colors
D Natural light auto
4500–
8000
Description
White balance is adjusted
automatically for optimal results with
most light sources. When an optional
flash unit is used, white balance will
be adjusted according to the lighting
produced by the flash.
Eliminate warm color cast produced
by incandescent lighting.
Partially preserve warm color cast
produced by incandescent lighting.
Preserve warm color cast produced
by incandescent lighting.
When used under natural light, this
option produces colors closer to
those seen by the naked eye.
Use with subjects lit by direct
sunlight.
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
H Direct sunlight
5200
G
M
J
I
Cloudy
6000
Shade
8000 Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
Incandescent
3000 Use under incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
Warm-white fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white fluorescent
Day white fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
High temp. mercury-vapor
2700
3000
Use under fluorescent lighting;
3700
choose bulb type according to light
4200 source.
5000
6500
7200
Use with studio strobe lighting and
5400
5 Flash
other large flash units.
* Color temperature. All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
64 Basic Settings
Option
K*
Description
Choose color temperature from list of
Choose color
2500–
values or by holding Fn1 button and
K temperature
10,000
rotating sub-command dial.
Measure white balance for subject or
light source (press and hold Fn1
button to enter direct measurement
— mode, 0 101), copy white balance
L Preset manual
from existing photograph, or choose
existing value by holding Fn1 button
and rotating sub-command dial.
* Color temperature. All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
A 4 (“Auto”)
The photo info for pictures shot using auto
white balance lists the color temperature
selected by the camera at the time the
picture was taken. You can use this as
reference when choosing a value for
Choose color temperature. To view
shooting data during playback, go to
Playback display options in the playback menu and select Shooting
data.
Basic Settings 65
D D (“Natural Light Auto”)
D (Natural light auto) may not produce the desired results under
artificial light. Choose 4 (Auto) or an option that matches the light
source.
D Studio Flash Lighting
4 (Auto) may not produce the desired results with large studio flash
units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to 5 (Flash) and
use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
D White Balance Fine-Tuning
At settings other than Choose color temperature, white balance can
be fine-tuned using the White balance items in the i menu and the
photo and movie shooting menus (0 99).
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
“Warmer” (redder) colors
3000
4000
“Cooler” (bluer) colors
5000
6000
8000
10000 [ K ]
In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to
intentionally make colors colder, higher values if your pictures are
tinged blue or to intentionally make colors warmer.
66 Basic Settings
Silent Photography
To enable the electronic shutter and
eliminate the noise and vibration caused
by operation of the mechanical shutter,
select On for Silent photography in the
photo shooting menu. Note that the
electronic shutter will be used regardless
of the option selected for Custom Setting d5 (Shutter type).
An icon is displayed while silent
photography is in effect. In release
modes other than Continuous H
(extended), the display will briefly go
dark when the shutter is released to
signal that a photo has been taken.
Enabling silent photography changes the frame advance rates
for continuous release modes (0 85) and disables some
features, including the flash, long exposure noise reduction,
flicker reduction, and the beep speaker.
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography mutes the shutter, but this does
not absolve photographers of the need to respect their subjects’
privacy and image rights. Although the noise of the mechanical
shutter is muted, other sounds may still be audible, for example during
autofocus or aperture adjustment or if the G or K button is pressed
when an option other than Off is selected for Vibration reduction.
During silent photography, flicker, banding, or distortion may be
visible in the display and in the final picture under fluorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera or subject moves during
shooting. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may
also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some areas of the
frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the
subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary
light source.
Basic Settings 67
Rating Pictures
Selected pictures can be rated or marked as candidates for later
deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in Capture NX-D and
ViewNX-i. Protected pictures cannot be rated.
1 Select an image.
Press the K button to start playback
and display a picture you want to rate.
2 Display the i menu.
Press the i button to view the
i menu.
3 Select Rating.
Highlight Rating and press J.
4 Choose a rating.
Rotate the main command dial to
choose a rating of from zero to five
stars, or select d to mark the picture
as a candidate for later deletion. Press
J to complete the operation.
68 Basic Settings
Protecting Pictures from Deletion
Use the Protect option in the i menu to protect pictures from
accidental deletion. Note that this does NOT prevent pictures
being deleted when the memory card is formatted.
1 Select an image.
Press the K button to start playback
and display a picture you want to
protect.
2 Display the i menu.
Press the i button to view the i
menu.
3 Select Protect.
Highlight Protect and press J.
Protected pictures are indicated by a
P icon; to remove protection, display
the picture and repeat Steps 2–3.
A Removing Protection from All Pictures
To remove protection from all pictures in the folder or folders currently
selected for Playback folder in the playback menu, select Unprotect
all in the i menu.
Basic Settings 69
Shooting Controls
This chapter describes controls that can be used during
shooting.
The Mode Dial
Press the mode dial lock
Mode dial
release and rotate the mode
dial to choose from the
following modes:
• b Auto: A “point-and-shoot”
mode in which the camera
sets exposure and hue
Mode dial lock release
(0 41, 45).
• P Programmed auto: The camera sets shutter speed and aperture
for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots and in
other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera
settings.
• S Shutter-priority auto: You choose the shutter speed; the camera
selects the aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur
motion.
• A Aperture-priority auto: You choose the aperture; the camera
selects the shutter speed for best results. Use to blur
backgrounds or bring both foreground and background into
focus.
• M Manual: You control both shutter speed and aperture. Set
shutter speed to “bulb” or “time” for long time-exposures.
• U1, U2, U3 User settings modes: Assign frequently-used settings to
these positions for quick recall.
70 Shooting Controls
P: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically
adjusts shutter speed and aperture
according to a built-in program to
ensure optimal exposure in most
situations. Different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture that
produce the same exposure can be selected by rotating the
main command dial (“flexible program”). While flexible program
is in effect, a flexible program indicator (U) is displayed. To
restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the
main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed,
choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
S: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the
shutter speed while the camera
automatically selects the aperture that
will produce the optimal exposure. To
choose a shutter speed, rotate the main
command dial. Shutter speed can be set
to “×200” or to values between 30 s and
1/8000 s and can be locked at the selected
setting (0 281).
Monitor
Control panel
Shooting Controls 71
A: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the
aperture while the camera automatically
selects the shutter speed that will
produce the optimal exposure. To
choose an aperture between the
minimum and maximum values for the
lens, rotate the sub-command dial.
Aperture can be locked at the selected
setting (0 281).
Monitor
Control panel
A Movie Mode Exposure Settings
The following exposure settings can be adjusted in movie mode:
1
2
3
4
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO sensitivity
P, S 1
—
—
— 2, 3
A
✔
—
— 2, 3
M
✔
✔
✔ 3, 4
Exposure for mode S is equivalent to mode P.
The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the ISO sensitivity
settings > Maximum sensitivity option in the movie shooting menu.
Regardless of the option chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Maximum
sensitivity or for ISO sensitivity (mode M), the upper limit when On is
selected for Electronic VR in the movie shooting menu is ISO 25600 (Z 7) or 51200 (Z 6).
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO control (mode
M) in the movie shooting menu, the upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the
Maximum sensitivity option.
72 Shooting Controls
M: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and
aperture. Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter
speed, and the sub-command dial to set aperture. Shutter speed
can be set to “×200” or to values between 30 s and 1/8000 s, or the
shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure
(0 78). Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to
check exposure.
Monitor
Control panel
Shutter speed
Shutter speed
Aperture
Aperture
Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected
settings.
Shooting Controls 73
D Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators show whether the photograph would be
under- or over-exposed at current settings. Depending on the option
chosen for Custom Setting b1 (EV steps for exposure cntrl), the
amount of under- or overexposure is shown in increments of 1/3 or
1/2 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the
displays will flash.
Custom Setting b1 set to “1/3 step”
Underexposed
Overexposed
Optimal exposure
by 1/3 EV
by over 3 EV
Monitor
Viewfinder
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control (Mode M)
If auto ISO sensitivity control (0 81) is enabled, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the selected shutter
speed and aperture.
74 Shooting Controls
User Settings: U1, U2, and U3 Modes
Assign frequently-used settings to the U1, U2, and U3 positions on
the mode dial.
❚❚ Saving User Settings
Follow the steps below to save settings:
1 Select a mode.
Rotate the mode dial to
the desired mode.
2 Adjust settings.
Make the desired adjustments to camera settings, including:
• photo shooting menu options,
• movie shooting menu options,
• Custom Settings, and
• shooting mode, shutter speed (modes S and M), aperture
(modes A and M), flexible program (mode P), exposure
compensation, and flash compensation.
3 Select Save user settings.
Highlight Save user settings in the
setup menu and press 2.
4 Select a position.
Highlight Save to U1, Save to U2, or Save to U3 and press 2.
Shooting Controls 75
5 Save user settings.
Highlight Save settings and press J to assign the settings
selected in Steps 1 and 2 to the mode dial position selected in
Step 4.
❚❚ Recalling User Settings
Rotating the mode dial to U1,
U2, or U3 recalls the settings
last saved to that position.
❚❚ Resetting User Settings
To reset settings for U1, U2, or U3 to default values:
1 Select Reset user settings.
Highlight Reset user settings in the
setup menu and press 2.
2 Select a position.
Highlight Reset U1, Reset U2, or Reset U3 and press 2.
3 Reset user settings.
Highlight Reset and press J to restore default settings for
the selected position. The camera will function in mode P.
76 Shooting Controls
D User Settings
The following cannot be saved to U1, U2, or U3.
Photo shooting menu:
Movie shooting menu:
• Storage folder
• Choose image area
• Choose image area
• Manage Picture Control
• Manage Picture Control
• Multiple exposure
• Interval timer shooting
• Time-lapse movie
• Focus shift shooting
Shooting Controls 77
Long Time-Exposures (Mode M)
Select the following shutter speeds for
long time-exposures of moving lights,
the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.
• Bulb: The shutter remains open while
the shutter-release button is held
down.
• Time: The exposure starts when the
shutter-release button is pressed and
ends when the button is pressed a
second time.
• Shutter speed: Bulb
(35-second exposure)
• Aperture: f/25
To prevent blur, mount the camera on a tripod or use an optional
wireless remote controller, remote cord, or other remote release
device. Nikon also recommends using a fully-charged battery or
an optional AC adapter and power connector to prevent loss of
power while the shutter is open. Note that noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in long
exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing On
for Long exposure NR in the photo shooting menu.
1 Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface.
2 Select mode M.
Rotate the mode dial to M.
78 Shooting Controls
3 Choose a shutter speed.
Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of
Bulb or Time.
Bulb
Time
4 Open the shutter.
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button all the
way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until the
exposure is complete.
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
5 Close the shutter.
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Shooting Controls 79
The S (ISO Sensitivity) Button
Hold the S button and rotate the main
command dial to adjust the camera’s
sensitivity to light according to the
amount of light available. The current
setting is shown in the shooting display
and control panel. Choose from settings
of from ISO 64 to ISO 25600 (or in the
case of the Z 6, of from ISO 100 to
ISO 51200); settings of from about 0.3 to
1 EV below the lowest of these values
and 0.3 to 2 EV above the highest are
also available for special situations. b
mode offers an additional ISO-A (auto)
option.
S button
Main command dial
D ISO Sensitivity
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,
allowing faster shutter speeds or smaller apertures, but the more likely
the image is to be affected by noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog,
or lines). Noise is particularly likely at settings between Hi 0.3 and Hi 2.
D Hi 0.3–Hi 2
Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–2 EV over the
highest numerical value. Hi 0.3 is equivalent to ISO 32000 (Z 7) or
64000 (Z 6), Hi 2 to ISO 102400 (Z 7) or 204800 (Z 6).
D Lo 0.3–Lo 1
Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–1 EV below the
lowest numerical value. Lo 0.3 is equivalent to ISO 50 (Z 7) or 80 (Z 6),
Lo 1 to ISO 32 (Z 7) or 50 (Z 6). Use for larger apertures or slow shutter
speeds when lighting is bright. Highlights may lose some detail; in
most cases, ISO sensitivities at or above the lowest numerical value are
recommended.
80 Shooting Controls
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
In modes P, S, A, and M, auto ISO
Sub-command dial
sensitivity control can be enabled or
disabled by holding the S button and
rotating the sub-command dial. When
auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled,
ISO sensitivity will automatically be
adjusted if optimal exposure cannot be
achieved at the value selected with the
S button and main command dial. To
prevent ISO sensitivity going too high,
S button
you can choose an upper limit of from
ISO 100 (Z 7) or 200 (Z 6) to Hi 2 using the
ISO sensitivity settings > Maximum sensitivity item in the
photo shooting menu.
When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the shooting
display will show ISO AUTO and control panel ISO-A. When
sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user, the
altered value is shown in the display.
Monitor
Control panel
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than that chosen for
Maximum sensitivity when auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled,
the value selected by the user will be used instead. When a flash is
used, shutter speed will be restricted to values between the speed
selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed) and the speed
selected for Custom Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed).
Shooting Controls 81
The E (Exposure Compensation) Button
In modes other than b, exposure compensation can be used to
alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera, making
pictures brighter or darker. Choose from values between –5 EV
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of
1
/3 EV (photographs only; the range for movies is –3 to + 3 EV). In
general, positive values make the subject brighter while
negative values make it darker.
−1 EV
No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E
button and rotate the main command dial until the desired
value is displayed.
E button
Control panel
Main command dial
82 Shooting Controls
At values other than ±0.0, the exposure indicator and a E icon
will be displayed after you release the E button. The current
value for exposure compensation can be confirmed by pressing
the E button.
Monitor
Viewfinder
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0. Exposure compensation is not reset when
the camera is turned off.
D Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change. The exposure
indicator and the current value for exposure compensation can be
displayed by pressing the E button.
D Flash Photography
When an optional flash unit is used, exposure compensation affects
both flash level and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main
subject and the background. Custom Setting e3 (Exposure comp. for
flash) can be used to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to
the background only.
Shooting Controls 83
The c/E (Release Mode/Self-Timer) Button
The “release mode” determines what happens when the shutterrelease button is pressed. To choose a release mode, hold the
c (E) button and rotate the main command dial. Press J when
the desired option is highlighted; the selected option is
indicated by icons in the shooting display and control panel.
Monitor
Control panel
The following options are available in photo mode.
Option
U
V
W
Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the
Single frame
shutter-release button is pressed.
While the shutter-release button is held down, the
camera records 1–5 frames per second. The frame
Continuous L rate can be chosen by rotating the sub-command
dial when Continuous L is highlighted in the
release-mode menu.
While the shutter-release button is held down, the
Continuous H
camera records up to about 5.5 frames per second.
84 Shooting Controls
Option
X
E
Description
While the shutter-release button is held down, the
Continuous H camera records up to about 9 frames per second
(extended)
(Z 7) or 12 frames per second (Z 6). Optional flash
units cannot be used. Flicker reduction has no effect.
Self-timer
Take pictures with the self-timer (0 87).
D The Shooting Display
In continuous low-speed and continuous high-speed modes, the
display is updated in real time even while shooting is in progress.
D Frame Advance Rate
Frame advance rate varies with camera settings. The approximate
maximum rates at different settings are given in the table below.
Release mode
Image quality
JPEG/TIFF
Continuous L
NEF (RAW)/
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
JPEG/TIFF
Continuous H
NEF (RAW)/
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
JPEG/TIFF
Continuous H
(extended)
NEF (RAW)/
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
Bit depth
—
12
14
—
12
14
—
12
14
Silent photography
Off
On
Z 7: 4 fps
Z 6: 4.5 fps
5 fps
Z 7: 3.5 fps
Z 6: 4 fps
Z 7: 4 fps
5.5 fps
Z 6: 4.5 fps
Z 7: 5 fps
Z 7: 3.5 fps
Z 6: 5.5 fps
Z 6: 4 fps
Z 7: 9 fps
Z 7: 8 fps
Z 6: 12 fps
Z 6: 12 fps
Z 7: 8 fps
Z 7: 6.5 fps
Z 6: 9 fps
Z 6: 8 fps
Shooting Controls 85
D Continuous H (Extended)
Depending on camera settings, exposure may vary erratically during
each burst. This can be prevented by locking exposure (0 90).
D The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card. The approximate number of images that can be
stored in the buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count
displays while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Monitor
Control panel
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the
memory card access lamp will light. Depending on shooting
conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a
few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or
remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone
out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the
power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been
recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer,
the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the
memory card.
86 Shooting Controls
In movie mode, you can choose the operation performed when
the shutter-release button is pressed (0 45).
Option
U
c
Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the
shutter-release button is pressed. Regardless of the
Single frame
option selected, a maximum of 50 photos can be
taken with each movie.
The camera takes photographs for up to 3 (Z 7) or 2
(Z 6) seconds at a time while the shutter-release
button is held down. The frame rate varies with the
Continuous
option selected for Frame size/frame rate in the
movie shooting menu. Only one photograph can be
taken at a time while movie recording is in progress.
The Self-Timer
In self-timer mode, pressing the shutter-release button starts a
timer, and a photo is taken when the timer expires.
1 Select self-timer mode.
Keeping the c (E) button pressed,
rotate the main command dial to
highlight E (self-timer).
2 Choose the shutter-release delay.
Rotate the sub-command dial to
select the shutter-release delay and
press J.
Shooting Controls 87
3 Frame the photograph and focus.
If AF-S is selected for focus mode, the
timer will not start unless the camera
is able to focus.
4 Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down to start the timer. A E
icon will appear in the display and the
self-timer lamp will start to flash,
stopping two seconds before the
photograph is taken.
D Taking Multiple Shots
Use Custom Setting c2 (Self-timer) to choose the number of shots
taken, and the interval between the shots taken, when the self-timer
finishes counting down.
88 Shooting Controls
The Sub-Selector
Use the sub-selector as a joystick to
select the focus point, or press the center
to lock focus and/or exposure.
Focus-Point Selection
Use the sub-selector to select the focus
point in the shooting display. Focuspoint selection is not available when
auto-area AF is selected for AF-area
mode (0 54).
Focus point
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Pressing the center of the sub-selector locks exposure at the
current setting. AE lock can be used to recompose shots after
metering a subject that will not be in the selected focus area in
the final composition, and is particularly effective with spot or
center-weighted metering.
Focus Lock
Press the center of the sub-selector to lock focus on the current
subject when AF-C is selected for focus mode. When using focus
lock, choose an AF-area mode other than auto-area AF.
Shooting Controls 89
❚❚ Locking Focus and Exposure
Follow the steps below to use focus and exposure lock.
1 Set focus and exposure.
Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the
shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure.
2 Lock focus and exposure.
Shutter-release button
With the shutter-release button
pressed halfway, press the center of
the sub-selector to lock both focus
and exposure (an AE-L icon will be
displayed).
Sub-selector
90 Shooting Controls
3 Recompose the photograph and
shoot.
Focus will remain locked between
shots if you keep the shutter-release
button pressed halfway (AF-S) or keep
the center of the sub-selector
pressed, allowing several
photographs in succession to be
taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus
again at the new distance.
D AF-S
When AF-S is selected for focus mode, focus will lock while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway (focus will also lock while the center
of the sub-selector is pressed).
D Using the Shutter-Release Button for Exposure Lock
If On (half press) is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release
button AE-L), exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
Shooting Controls 91
The i Menu
Pressing the i button displays the i menu: a menu of
frequently-used settings for the current mode.
Using the i Menu
Press the i button to display the i menu.
Highlight items using the multi selector and press J to view
options, then highlight an option and press J to select it and
return to the i menu (to exit to the previous display without
changing settings, press the i button).
A The Command Dials
You can also adjust settings for highlighted
items by rotating the main command dial to
choose an option and then pressing J (suboptions, if available, can be selected by
rotating the sub-command dial; in some
cases, the same options can be selected
using either dial). The current option will
also be selected if you highlight another item with the multi selector or
press the shutter-release button halfway.
92 The i Menu
The Photo-Mode i Menu
At default settings, the following items appear in the i menu for
photo mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
3
5
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
Set Picture Control ........................94 7 Wi-Fi connection ........................ 109
White balance ................................98 8 Active D-Lighting ....................... 110
Image quality .............................. 104 9 Release mode.............................. 111
Image size..................................... 106 10 Vibration reduction.................... 112
Flash mode................................... 107 11 AF-area mode.............................. 113
Metering ....................................... 108 12 Focus mode ................................. 113
The i Menu 93
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of
scene.
Option
n
Q
R
S
T
o
p
q
k01–
k20
Description
The camera automatically adjusts hues and
tones based on the Standard Picture Control.
The complexions of portrait subjects will appear
Auto
softer, and such elements as the foliage and sky
in outdoor shots more vivid, than in pictures
taken with the Standard Picture Control.
Standard processing for balanced results.
Standard
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose
Neutral
for photographs that will later be processed or
retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint
Vivid
effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize
primary colors.
Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
Process portraits for skin with natural texture
Portrait
and a rounded feel.
Landscape
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
Details are preserved over a wide tone range,
from highlights to shadows. Choose for
Flat
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Choose from the following Picture Controls,
each a unique combination of hue, tone,
saturation, and other settings tuned for a
Creative Picture particular effect: Dream, Morning, Pop,
Control
Sunday, Somber, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached,
Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue,
Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, and
Carbon.
94 The i Menu
To view Picture Control settings,
highlight a Picture Control and press 3.
Changes to settings can be previewed in
the display (0 96).
The current Picture Control is indicated
by an icon in the display during
shooting.
The i Menu 95
❚❚ Modifying Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be modified to suit
the scene or the photographer’s creative
intent. Highlight Set Picture Control in
the i menu and press J to display the
Picture Control list, then highlight a
Picture Control and press 3 to display
Picture Control settings. Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or
rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in increments of
0.25 (the options available vary with the Picture Control
selected). Default settings can be restored by pressing the O
button.
After adjusting settings to your
satisfaction, press J to put the changes
into effect and return to the i menu.
Picture Controls that have been
modified from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“U”).
D Previous Settings
The j indicator under the value display in
the Picture Control setting menu indicates
the previous value for the setting.
D “A” (Auto)
Selecting the A (auto) option available for some settings lets the
camera adjust the setting automatically. Results vary with exposure
and the position of the subject in the frame.
A The “n Auto“ Picture Control
If n Auto is selected for Set Picture
Control, settings can be adjusted in the
range A−2 to A+2.
96 The i Menu
The following settings are available:
Option
Effect level
Description
Mute or heighten the effect of Creative Picture Control.
Quickly adjust levels for balanced Sharpening, Midrange sharpening, and Clarity. You can also make
individual adjustments to the following parameters:
• Sharpening: Control the sharpness of details and
outlines.
• Mid-range sharpening: Adjust sharpness according to
the fineness of the patterns and lines in mid-tones
affected by Sharpening and Clarity.
• Clarity: Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of
thicker outlines without affecting brightness or
dynamic range.
Adjust contrast.
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in
highlights or shadows.
Control the vividness of colors.
Adjust hue.
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
pictures.
Choose the tint used in monochrome pictures. Pressing
3 when an option other than B&W (black-and-white) is
selected displays saturation options.
Quick sharp
Sharpening
Mid-range
sharpening
Clarity
Contrast
Brightness
Saturation
Hue
Filter effects
Toning
Toning
(Creative
Picture
Control)
Adjust the shade of color used for Creative Picture
Controls.
D Filter Effects
Choose from the following:
Mode
Y (yellow)
O (orange)
R (red)
G (green)
Setting
These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone down the brightness
of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than
yellow, red more contrast than orange.
Green softens skin tones and can be used for portraits.
The i Menu 97
White Balance
Adjust white balance (for more information, see “White Balance”,
0 63).
Option
4 Auto
Keep white (reduce warm colors)
Keep overall atmosphere
Keep warm lighting colors
D Natural light auto
H
G
M
J
Direct sunlight
Cloudy
Shade
Incandescent
Option
I Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
Warm-white fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white fluorescent
Day white fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
High temp. mercury-vapor
5 Flash
K Choose color temperature
L Preset manual
Pressing 3 when Auto or Fluorescent is
highlighted displays sub-options for the
highlighted item.
The current white balance option is
indicated by an icon in the display
during shooting.
98 The i Menu
❚❚ Fine-Tuning White Balance
Selecting White balance in the i menu
displays a list of white balance options. If
an option other than Choose color
temperature is highlighted, fine-tuning
options can be displayed by pressing 3.
Any changes to fine-tuning options can
be previewed in the display.
Increase green
Increase blue
Increase amber
Increase magenta
Tap the arrows in the display or use the multi selector to finetune white balance. Press J to save settings and return to the i
menu.
An asterisk (“U”) next to the white
balance icon in the shooting display
indicates that fine-tuning is in effect.
The i Menu 99
❚❚ Choosing a Color Temperature
Selecting White balance in the i menu displays a list of white
balance options. When Choose color temperature is
highlighted, color temperature options can be viewed by
pressing 3.
Value for
Amber–Blue axis
Value for
Green–Magenta axis
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the Amber–Blue or Green–
Magenta axis and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J to save
settings and return to the i menu. If a value other than zero is
selected for the Green–Magenta axis, an asterisk (“U“) will be
displayed next to the white balance icon.
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with fluorescent
lighting. Choose I (Fluorescent) for fluorescent light sources. With
other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is
appropriate.
100 The i Menu
❚❚ Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall up to six custom white
balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to
compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Follow the
steps below to measure a value for preset manual white balance.
1 Display white balance presets.
Highlight Preset manual in the i
menu white balance display and
press 3 to display a list of white
balance presets.
2 Select a preset.
Highlight the desired white balance
preset (d-1 to d-6) and press J to
select the highlighted preset and
return to the i menu.
D Protected Presets
Presets indicated by a g icon are
protected and cannot be changed.
3 Select direct measurement mode.
Highlight White balance in the i
menu and press and hold J until the
L icons in the shooting display and
control panel start to flash and white
balance target (r) is displayed at the
selected focus point.
The i Menu 101
4 Measure white balance.
To measure white balance, tap a
white or gray object, or use the multi
selector to position the r over a
white or gray area of the display and
either press J or press the shutterrelease button all the way down (note that the r cannot be
repositioned when an optional flash unit is attached, in which
case you will need to measure white balance with a white or
gray object positioned in the center of the frame).
If the camera is unable to measure
white balance, a message will be
displayed. Try measuring white
balance again with a different target.
5 Exit direct measurement mode.
Press the i button to exit direct measurement mode.
102 The i Menu
D Measuring Preset Manual White Balance
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured while HDR or
multiple exposure shooting is in progress.
D Direct Measurement Mode
Direct measurement mode will end if no operations are performed in
the time selected for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) > Standby
timer.
D Managing Presets
The White balance > Preset manual option in the photo shooting
menu can be used to copy white balance from an existing photograph
to a selected preset, add comments, or protect presets.
D Preset Manual: Selecting a Preset
To choose a preset, select White balance >
Preset manual in the photo shooting
menu, then highlight a preset and press J.
If no value currently exists for the selected
preset, white balance will be set to 5200 K,
the same as Direct sunlight.
The i Menu 103
Image Quality
Choose a file format for photographs.
Option
NEF (RAW) + JPEG finem
NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine
NEF (RAW) + JPEG normalm
NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal
NEF (RAW) + JPEG basicm
NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)
JPEG finem
JPEG fine
JPEG normalm
JPEG normal
JPEG basicm
JPEG basic
TIFF (RGB)
Description
Record two copies of each photo: an NEF
(RAW) image and a JPEG copy. Only the JPEG
copy is displayed during playback, but
deleting the JPEG copy also deletes the NEF
(RAW) image. The NEF (RAW) image can only
be viewed using a computer.
Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
Record photos in JPEG format. Compression
increases and file size decreases as quality
progresses from “fine” through “normal” to
“basic”. Choose options with m to maximize
quality, options without m to ensure that all
images have more or less the same file size.
Record photos in uncompressed TIFF-RGB
format at a bit depth of 8 bits per channel
(24-bit color).
The option currently selected is shown in
the display during shooting.
104 The i Menu
A NEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) image files (extension “*.nef”) contain the raw data output
from the image sensor. Using Nikon’s ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D
software, you can adjust and re-adjust settings such as exposure
compensation and white balance as often as you please without
degrading image quality, making this format ideal for photos that will
be processed in multiple different ways. ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D
are available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download Center.
The process of converting NEF (RAW) images to other formats such as
JPEG is referred to as “NEF (RAW) processing”. You can save NEF (RAW)
images in other formats using the ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D
computer applications or the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
camera retouch menu.
The i Menu 105
Image Size
Choose the size at which photographs are recorded.
Option
Large
NEF (RAW) Medium
Small
Large
JPEG/TIFF Medium
Small
Description
Choose the size for photos recorded in NEF (RAW)
format. NEF (RAW) is available only when an NEF
(RAW) option is selected for image quality.
Choose the size for photos recorded in JPEG or TIFF
format.
The option currently selected is shown
in the display during shooting.
The physical dimensions of the photos in pixels varies with the
option selected for Choose image area.
FX (36 × 24)
DX (24 × 16)
5 : 4 (30 × 24)
1 : 1 (24 × 24)
16 : 9 (36 × 20)
Large
8256 × 5504
5408 × 3600
6880 × 5504
5504 × 5504
8256 × 4640
Image size
Medium
6192 × 4128
4048 × 2696
5152 × 4120
4128 × 4128
6192 × 3480
Small
4128 × 2752
2704 × 1800
3440 × 2752
2752 × 2752
4128 × 2320
FX (36 × 24)
DX (24 × 16)
1 : 1 (24 × 24)
16 : 9 (36 × 20)
Large
6048 × 4024
3936 × 2624
4016 × 4016
6048 × 3400
Image size
Medium
4528 × 3016
2944 × 1968
3008 × 3008
4528 × 2544
Small
3024 × 2016
1968 × 1312
2000 × 2000
3024 × 1696
Z 7:
Image area
Z 6:
Image area
106 The i Menu
Flash Mode
Choose a flash mode for optional flash units (0 354). The
options available depend on the mode selected with the mode
dial.
Option
Fill flash
I
J Red-eye
Available in
b, P, S, A, M
Option
Available in
Rear-curtain sync P, S, A, M
M
s Flash off
b, P, S, A, M
reduction
K Slow sync +
red-eye
P, A
L Slow sync
The option currently selected is
indicated by an icon in the display
during shooting.
The i Menu 107
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Option
L
M
N
t
Description
The camera meters a wide area of the frame and
sets exposure according to tone distribution,
Matrix metering
color, composition, and distance for results close
to those seen by the naked eye.
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns
the greatest weight to an area in the center of the
frame, the size of which can be chosen using
Center-weighted
Custom Setting b3 (Center-weighted area). This
metering
is the classic meter for portraits and is also
recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
The camera meters a 4 mm circle (equivalent to
approximately 1.5% of the frame) centered on the
current focus point, making it possible to meter
off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the
Spot metering
camera will instead meter the center focus point).
Spot metering ensures that the subject will be
correctly exposed, even when the background is
much brighter or darker.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to
Highlighthighlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail
weighted
in highlights, for example when photographing
metering
spotlit performers on-stage.
The option currently selected is
indicated by an icon in the display
during shooting.
108 The i Menu
Wi-Fi Connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. Enable Wi-Fi to establish wireless
connections to computers or between the camera and
smartphones or tablets (smart devices) running the SnapBridge
app.
The camera displays a Wi-Fi icon when
Wi-Fi is enabled.
To turn Wi-Fi off, highlight Wi-Fi connection in the i menu and
press J. If Wi-Fi is currently enabled, a Close Wi-Fi connection
prompt will be displayed; press J to end the connection.
A Wireless Connections
For information on establishing wireless connections to computers or
smart devices, see the Network Guide, available from the Nikon
Download Center:
Z 7: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/492/Z_7.html
Z 6: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/493/Z_6.html
More information on using SnapBridge is available via the app’s online
help.
The i Menu 109
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for highcontrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of
shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used
with matrix metering.
Off
Option
Y Auto
Z
P
Q
R
c
Y Auto
Description
The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting in
response to shooting conditions (in mode M, however,
Y Auto is equivalent to Q Normal).
Extra high
High
Normal
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed
from Z Extra high, P High, Q Normal, and
R Low.
Low
Off
Active D-Lighting off.
The option currently selected is
indicated by an icon in the display
during shooting.
D Active D-Lighting
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photos
taken with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some
subjects. Active D-Lighting does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 0.3–
Hi 2), including high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity control.
110 The i Menu
Release Mode
Choose the operation performed when the shutter-release
button is pressed all the way down. For more information, see
“The c/E (Release Mode/Self-Timer) Button” (0 84).
Option
U Single frame
V Continuous L
W Continuous H
Option
X Continuous H (extended)
E Self-timer
When Continuous L or Self-timer is highlighted, additional
options can be displayed by pressing 3.
Pressing 3 when Continuous L is
highlighted displays frame advance rate
options.
Pressing 3 when Self-timer is
highlighted displays options for the
shutter-release delay and the number of
shots taken when the timer expires.
The current release mode is shown by
icons in the shooting display and control
panel.
The i Menu 111
Vibration Reduction
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction. The options
available vary with the lens.
Option
On
C
Normal
D Sport
E Off
Description
Choose for enhanced vibration reduction when
photographing static subjects.
Choose when photographing athletes and other
subjects that are moving rapidly and unpredictably.
Vibration reduction off.
Options other than Off are shown by an
icon in the display during shooting.
D Vibration Reduction
Vibration reduction may be unavailable with some lenses. When
using vibration reduction, wait for the image in the display to stabilize
before shooting. With some lenses, the image in the display may also
jiggle after the shutter is released; this is normal and does not indicate
a malfunction.
Sport or On is recommended for panning shots. In Sport, Normal, and
On modes, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part
of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration
reduction will be applied only to vertical shake).
To prevent unintended results, select Off when the camera is mounted
on a tripod unless the tripod head is unsecured or the camera is
mounted on a monopod, in which case Normal, Sport, or On is
recommended.
112 The i Menu
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point
for autofocus. For more information, see “AF-Area Mode” (0 54).
Option
Option
3 Pinpoint AF
d Single-point AF
e Dynamic-area AF
f Wide-area AF (S)
g Wide-area AF (L)
h Auto-area AF
The option currently selected is shown
by an icon in the display during
shooting.
Focus Mode
The focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more
information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (0 52).
Option
Single AF
AF-S
AF-C Continuous AF
MF
Option
Manual focus
The option currently selected is shown
by an icon in the display during
shooting.
The i Menu 113
The Movie-Mode i Menu
At default settings, the following items appear in the i menu for
movie mode.
1
3
5
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
1 Set Picture Control......................115 7 Wi-Fi connection......................... 120
2 White balance..............................115 8 Active D-Lighting ....................... 120
3 Frame size and rate/
9 Electronic VR................................ 120
image quality .............................116 10 Vibration reduction.................... 121
4 Microphone sensitivity..............118 11 AF-area mode.............................. 121
5 Choose image area.....................119 12 Focus mode.................................. 121
6 Metering .......................................120
A “Same as Photo Settings”
If Same as photo settings is selected for
Set Picture Control, White balance,
Active D-Lighting, or Vibration reduction
in the movie shooting menu, a h icon
will appear at the top left corner of the i
menu, indicating that the options selected
for these settings in photo mode also apply
in movie mode and vice versa.
114 The i Menu
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for movie recording. For more
information, see “Set Picture Control” (0 94).
White Balance
Adjust white balance for movie recording. For more information,
see “White Balance” (0 63, 98).
The i Menu 115
Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality
Select the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. You can
also choose from two Movie quality options: High quality
(indicated by frame size/rate icons with “m”) and Normal.
Together, these options determine the maximum bit rate, as
shown in the following table.
r
s
t
w
x
y/y
z/z
1/1
2/2
3/3
A
B
C
Max. bit rate (Mbps)
Max.
recording
High
time
quality Normal
Frame size/frame rate 1
3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p
3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 25p
144
3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 24p
1920 × 1080; 120p
—2
3
1920 × 1080; 100p 3
29 min.
59 s 4
1920 × 1080; 60p
1920 × 1080; 50p
56
28
28
14
1920 × 1080; 30p
1920 × 1080; 25p
1920 × 1080; 24p
1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) 3
1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) 3
1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)
3
36
—2
3 min.
29
1 Actual frame rates for values listed as 120p, 60p, 30p, and 24p are respectively 119.88 fps,
59.94 fps, 29.97 fps, and 23.976 fps.
2 Movie quality fixed at High quality.
3 Image area fixed at DX (Z 7) or FX (Z 6); face detection not enabled in auto-area AF AF-area
mode.
4 Each movie may be recorded across up to 8 files of up to 4 GB each. The number of files and the
length of each file vary with the options selected for Frame size/frame rate and
Movie quality. Movies recorded to memory cards formatted in the camera will however
be recorded as a single file regardless of size if the card has a capacity over 32 GB.
116 The i Menu
The option currently selected is shown
by an icon in the display.
❚❚ Slow-Motion Movies
To record silent slow-motion movies, select a “slow-motion”
option for Frame size/frame rate. Slow-motion movies are
recorded at 4 or 5 times the rated speed and play back at the
rated speed. Movies shot at 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slowmotion), for example, are recorded at a frame rate of roughly
120 fps and play back at around 30 fps, meaning that 10 seconds
recording produces about 40 seconds of footage.
Approximately 10 s
Recording
Playback
Approximately 40 s
Recording and playback speeds are shown below.
Frame size/frame rate
Recording speed
Normal
A 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) 120p (119.88 fps) 30p (29.97 fps)
25p (25 fps)
B 1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) 100p (100 fps)
C 1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion) 120p (119.88 fps) 24p (23.976 fps)
D Slow-Motion Movies
Features such as flicker reduction, electronic vibration reduction, and
time code output cannot be used when a “slow-motion” option is
selected.
The i Menu 117
Microphone Sensitivity
Turn the built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust
microphone sensitivity. Choose bA to adjust sensitivity
automatically or Microphone off to turn sound recording off or
adjust microphone sensitivity manually by choosing a value
between b1 and b20 (the higher the value, the higher the
sensitivity).
At settings other than bA, the option
currently selected is shown by an icon in
the display.
If the sound level is displayed in red, the
volume is too high. Reduce microphone
sensitivity.
D The 2 Icon
Movies recorded with the microphone off
are indicated by a 2 icon in full-frame and
movie playback.
118 The i Menu
Choose Image Area
Choose the size of the area on the image sensor used to record
movies. Select FX to shoot movies in what is referred to as “FXbased movie format”, DX to shoot in “DX-based movie format”.
The differences between the two formats are shown in the
illustration.
FX
DX
The dimensions of the area recorded vary with the frame size:
Format
Frame size
FX-based movie
format
DX-based movie
format
3840 × 2160
1920 × 1080
3840 × 2160
1920 × 1080
Area recorded (approximate)
Z7
Z6
35.9 × 20.2 mm
35.8 × 20.1 mm 35.9 × 20.1 mm
23.4 × 13.2 mm
23.5 × 13.2 mm
23.4 × 13.1 mm
The option currently selected is shown
by an icon in the display.
The i Menu 119
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure in movie mode. For more
information, see “Metering” (0 108), but note that spot
metering is not available.
Wi-Fi Connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information, see “Wi-Fi
Connection” (0 109).
Active D-Lighting
Choose an Active D-Lighting option for movie mode. For more
information, see “Active D-Lighting” (0 110). Note that if Same
as photo settings is selected for Active D-Lighting in the
movie shooting menu and Auto is selected in the photo
shooting menu, movies will be shot at a setting equivalent to
Normal.
Electronic VR
Select On to enable electronic vibration reduction in movie
mode. Electronic vibration reduction is not available at frame
sizes of 1920 × 1080; 120p, 1920 × 1080; 100p, or 1920 × 1080
(slow-motion). Note that when electronic vibration reduction is
on, the angle of view will be reduced, slightly increasing the
apparent focal length, and the maximum sensitivity for movie
recording is fixed at ISO 25600 (Z 7) or 51200 (Z 6).
An icon appears in the display while On
is selected.
120 The i Menu
Vibration Reduction
Choose vibration reduction option for movie mode. For more
information, see “Vibration Reduction” (0 112).
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point when autofocus
is enabled in movie mode. For more information, see “AF-Area
Mode” (0 54).
Option
Option
d Single-point AF
f Wide-area AF (S)
g Wide-area AF (L)
h Auto-area AF
Focus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses in movie mode. For more
information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (0 52).
Option
AF-S Single AF
AF-C Continuous AF
Option
AF-F Full-time AF
MF Manual focus
The i Menu 121
More About Playback
Learn more about viewing pictures and image information, the
playback i menu, playback zoom, and deleting pictures.
Viewing Pictures
Use the X and W (Q) buttons to cycle between full-frame and
thumbnail playback.
W
(Q)
W
(Q)
W
(Q)
X
X
X
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback
Full-Frame Playback
Press the K button to view the most
recent picture full frame in the display.
Additional pictures can be displayed by
pressing 4 or 2; to view additional
information on the current photograph,
press 1 or 3 or press the DISP button
(0 124).
122 More About Playback
Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple images, press the
W (Q) button when a picture is
displayed full frame. The number of
images displayed increases from 4 to 9 to
72 each time the W (Q) button is
pressed, and decreases with each press
of the X button. Use the multi selector to highlight images.
D Touch Controls
Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor
(0 11).
D Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On
for Rotate tall in the playback menu.
D Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu,
photographs are automatically displayed after shooting (because the
camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not rotated
automatically during image review). If On (monitor only) is selected,
photos will not be displayed in the viewfinder. In continuous release
modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph
in the current series displayed.
More About Playback 123
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 or press the DISP button to cycle
through photo information as shown below.
File information
None (image only) 1
Exposure
data 1
Highlights 1
Overview data 1
Location
data 2
RGB histogram 1
Shooting data 1
1 Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for Playback display options
in the playback menu.
2 Displayed only if embedded in the picture (0 306).
124 More About Playback
File Information
12 3
4
5
13
12
11
10
8
9
7
Protect status................................. 69
Retouch indicator ....................... 314
Upload marking.......................... 134
Focus point * ................................... 54
Frame number/
total number of frames
6
6 Image quality .............................. 104
7 Image size..................................... 106
8 Image area .......................... 119, 165
9 Time of recording ................ 38, 295
10 Date of recording................. 38, 295
11 Rating .............................................. 68
12 Folder name................................. 155
13 File name ............................. 165, 239
* Displayed only if Focus point is selected
for Playback display options.
1
2
3
4
5
Exposure Data
1 2
3
4
5
1 Shooting mode ............................. 70
2 Shutter speed ..........................71, 73
3 Aperture.......................................... 72
4 Exposure compensation ............. 82
5 ISO sensitivity * .............................. 80
* Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode
P, S, or A with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
More About Playback 125
Highlights
1
1 Highlights (areas that may be
overexposed)
2 Folder number-frame
number........................................ 161
2
RGB Histogram
1
2
126 More About Playback
3
4
5
6
1 Folder number-frame
number........................................ 161
2 White balance ......................... 63, 98
Color temperature ............... 100
White balance fine-tuning
..................................................99
Preset manual ....................... 101
3 Histogram (RGB channel)......... 127
4 Histogram (red channel)........... 127
5 Histogram (green channel)...... 127
6 Histogram (blue channel) ........ 127
D Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X. Use the X
and W (Q) buttons to zoom in and out and
scroll the image with the multi selector. The
histogram will be updated to show only the
data for the portion of the image visible in
the display.
D Histograms
Histograms show tone distribution, with pixel brightness (tone)
plotted on the horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical
axis. Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ
from those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample
histograms are shown below:
If the image contains
objects with a wide range of
brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be
relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted
to the left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted
to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
pictures in the display.
More About Playback 127
Shooting Data
Depending on settings at the time the picture was taken, there
may be up to five pages of shooting data: general, flash info,
Picture Control, advanced, and copyright information.
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 1 (General)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
128 More About Playback
1 Metering....................................... 108
Shutter type................................. 262
Shutter speed ......................... 71, 73
Aperture ..........................................72
2 Shooting mode..............................70
ISO sensitivity 1 ...............................80
3 Exposure compensation..............82
Optimal exposure tuning 2 ....... 258
4 Focal length
12 13
5 Lens data
6 Focus mode ....................................52
7 Vibration reduction.................... 112
8 White balance 3 ....................... 63, 98
9 White balance fine-tuning..........99
10 Color space .................................. 182
11 Camera name
12 Image area .......................... 119, 165
13 Folder number–frame
number........................................ 161
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 2 (Flash Info) 4
14
15
16
17
14
15
16
17
Flash type
Remote flash control ................. 362
Flash mode.......................... 107, 354
Flash control mode .................... 186
Flash compensation................... 189
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 3 (Picture Control)
18 Picture Control 5 ................... 94, 177
18
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 4 (Advanced)
19
20
21
22
23
24
19 High ISO noise reduction.......... 183
Long exposure noise
reduction..................................... 183
20 Active D-Lighting ....................... 110
21 HDR exposure differential ........ 207
HDR smoothing........................... 207
22 Vignette control .......................... 184
23 Retouch history........................... 314
24 Image comment ......................... 303
More About Playback 129
❚❚ Shooting Data, Page 5 (Copyright Information) 6
25
25 Name of photographer............. 304
26 Copyright holder ........................ 304
26
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, or A with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b4 (Fine-tune optimal exposure) has been set to a
value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Also includes color temperature of photos taken using auto white balance.
4 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 408).
5 The items displayed vary with the Picture Control selected when the picture was taken.
6 Copyright information is only displayed if recorded with the photograph using the
Copyright information option in the setup menu.
Location Data
The latitude, longitude, and other location data are supplied by
and vary with the GPS or smart device (0 306). In the case of
movies, the data give the location at the start of recording.
130 More About Playback
Overview Data
1 2 345
16
6
17 18 19 20 21
7
8 29
28
27
9
15
26 25
22
23
24
14 13 12 11 10
1 Frame number/
total number of frames
2 Upload marking ..........................134
3 Protect status................................. 69
4 Retouch indicator .......................314
5 Camera name
6 Image comment indicator........303
7 Location data indicator .............306
8 Histogram .....................................127
9 Image quality...............................104
10 Image size.....................................106
11 Image area...........................119, 165
12 File name .............................165, 239
13 Time of recording ................ 38, 295
14 Date of recording................. 38, 295
15 Folder name .................................155
16 Rating .............................................. 68
Metering ....................................... 108
Shooting mode ............................. 70
Shutter speed ..........................71, 73
Aperture.......................................... 72
ISO sensitivity 1 .............................. 80
Focal length
Active D-Lighting ....................... 110
Picture Control ..................... 94, 177
Color space................................... 182
Flash mode 2 ........................ 107, 354
White balance..........................63, 98
Color temperature ............... 100
White balance fine-tuning
................................................. 99
Preset manual ....................... 101
28 Flash compensation 2 ................. 189
Commander mode 2
29 Exposure compensation ............. 82
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, or A with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 408).
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
More About Playback 131
The i Button: Playback
Pressing the i button during playback
zoom or full-frame or thumbnail
playback displays the i menu for
playback mode. Select options using the
multi selector and J button and press
the i button to exit the menu and return
to playback.
The options available in the playback
i menu vary with the type of picture.
Photos: Pressing the i button when a photo is selected displays
the options listed below.
• Quick crop (displayed only during playback zoom): Save a copy of the
current image cropped to the area visible in the display. This
option is not available when histograms are displayed.
• Rating: Rate the current picture (0 68).
• Select to send/deselect (smart device/PC/WT): Select the current
picture for upload. The option displayed varies with the type of
device connected (0 134).
• Retouch: Use the options in the retouch menu (0 314) to create
a retouched copy of the current photograph.
• Choose folder: Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder
and press J to view the pictures in the highlighted folder.
• Protect: Add protection to or remove protection from the
current picture (0 69).
• Unprotect all (not available during playback zoom): Remove protection
from all pictures in the folder currently selected for Playback
folder in the playback menu.
132 More About Playback
Movies: The options below are available when a movie is selected.
• Rating: Rate the current picture (0 68).
• Select to send/deselect (PC/WT): Select the current picture for
upload. The option displayed varies with the type of device
connected (0 134).
• Volume control: Adjust playback volume.
• Trim movie: Trim footage from the current movie and save the
edited copy in a new file (0 135).
• Choose folder: Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder
and press J to view the pictures in the highlighted folder.
• Protect: Add protection to or remove protection from the
current picture (0 69).
• Unprotect all: Remove protection from all pictures in the folder
currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu.
Movies (playback paused): The options below are available when
movie playback is paused.
• Choose start/end point: Trim footage from the current movie and
save the edited copy in a new file (0 135).
• Save current frame: Save a selected frame as a JPEG still (0 138).
More About Playback 133
Select to Send/Deselect
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to
a smart device, computer, or ftp server. The i menu options used
to select pictures for upload vary with the type of device
connected:
• Select to send/deselect (smart device): Displayed when the camera is
connected to a smart device via built-in Bluetooth or Wi-Fi
using the Connect to smart device item in the setup menu
(0 308).
• Select to send/deselect (PC): Displayed when the camera is
connected to a computer via built-in Wi-Fi using the Connect
to PC item in the setup menu (0 309).
• Select to send/deselect (WT): Displayed when the camera is
connected to a computer or ftp server via an WT-7 wireless
transmitter (available separately) using the Wireless
transmitter (WT-7) item in the setup menu (0 309).
1 Select a picture.
Display a picture in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
select it in the thumbnail list.
2 Choose Select to send/deselect.
Press the i button to display the
i menu, then highlight Select to
send/deselect and press J. Pictures
selected for upload are indicated by a
W icon; to deselect, repeat Steps 1
and 2.
D Movies
Movies cannot be uploaded via Bluetooth. The maximum file size for
movies uploaded by other means is 4 GB.
134 More About Playback
Choose Start/End Point
Follow the steps below to create trimmed copies of movies.
1 Display a movie full frame.
2 Pause the movie on the new
opening frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” (0 49), pressing J
to start and resume playback and 3
to pause, and pressing 4 or 2 or
Movie progress bar
rotating the main command dial to
locate the desired frame. Your approximate position in the
movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause
playback when you reach the new opening frame.
3 Select Choose start/end point.
Press the i button to display the i
menu, then highlight Choose start/
end point and press J.
More About Playback 135
4 Select Start point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight Start point
and press J. The frames before the
current frame will be removed when
you save the copy in Step 9.
Start point
5 Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back,
rotate the main command dial; to skip
to the first or last frame, rotate the
sub-command dial).
6 Choose the end point.
Press the center of the sub-selector to
switch from the start point (w) to the
end point (x) selection tool and then
select the closing frame as described
in Step 5. The frames after the
selected frame will be removed when
you save the copy in Step 9.
End point
136 More About Playback
Sub-selector
7 Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
8 Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to interrupt the
preview and return to the save
options menu, press 1). To abandon
the current copy and select a new
start point or end point as described above, highlight Cancel
and press J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 9.
9 Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press
J to save the copy to a new file. To
replace the original movie file with
the edited copy, highlight Overwrite
existing file and press J.
D Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
D Removing Opening or Closing Footage
To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to
Step 7 without pressing the center of the sub-selector in Step 6. To
remove only the closing footage, select End point in Step 4, select the
closing frame, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the center of
the sub-selector in Step 6.
D “Trim Movie”
Movies can also be edited using the Trim movie option in the retouch
menu.
More About Playback 137
Save Current Frame
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1 Pause the movie on the desired
frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” (0 49), pressing J
to start and resume playback and 3
to pause. Pause the movie at the
frame you intend to copy.
2 Choose Save current frame.
Press the i button to display the i
menu, then highlight Save current
frame and press J to create a JPEG
copy of the current frame. The image
will be recorded at the dimensions
selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting
menu.
D Save Current Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save current frame option cannot
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
information.
138 More About Playback
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To zoom in during full-frame playback, press X or J.
Navigation window
On-screen guide
While zoom is in effect, you can:
• Zoom in or out/view other areas of the image: Press X or use stretch
gestures to zoom in to a maximum of approximately 32×, 24×,
or 16× for large, medium, or small images respectively (Z 7, or
in the case of the Z 6, to a maximum of approximately 24×, 18×,
or 12×; all figures are for FX format). Press W (Q) or use pinch
gestures to zoom out. While the photo is zoomed in, use the
multi selector or slide a finger over the screen to view areas not
currently visible in the display. Keep the multi selector pressed
to scroll rapidly to other areas of the frame. A navigation
window is displayed for a few seconds after the zoom ratio is
altered; the area currently visible in the display is indicated by a
yellow border. The bar under the navigation window shows the
zoom ratio, turning green at 1 : 1.
• Select faces: Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white
borders in the navigation window. Rotate the sub-command
dial or tap the on-screen guide to view other faces.
• View other images: Rotate the main command dial or tap the e or
f icons at the bottom of the display to view the same location
in other photos at the current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is
cancelled when a movie is displayed.
• Return to shooting mode: Press the shutter-release button halfway
or press the K button to exit to shooting mode.
• Display the menus: Press G to view the menus.
More About Playback 139
Deleting Pictures
Press the O button to delete the current picture or use the
Delete option in the playback menu to delete multiple selected
pictures, all pictures taken on a selected date, or all pictures in
the current playback folder (protected pictures cannot be
deleted). Exercise caution when deleting pictures, as pictures
cannot be recovered once deleted.
During Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1 Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
2 Press the O button again.
To delete the picture, press the O button again. To exit
without deleting the picture, press K.
140 More About Playback
The Playback Menu
The Delete item in the playback menu contains the following
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Delete selected pictures.
Q Selected
i Select date Delete all pictures taken on selected dates (0 142).
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
playback (0 155).
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Pictures
To delete multiple selected pictures, choose Selected and
follow the steps below.
1 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
picture and press the W (Q) button to
select or deselect. Selected pictures
are marked by a O icon (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button). Repeat as
desired to select additional pictures.
2 Delete the selected pictures.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
More About Playback 141
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Pictures Taken on Selected Dates
To delete all unprotected pictures taken on selected dates,
choose Delete > Select date in the playback menu and follow
the steps below.
1 Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to select
all pictures taken on the highlighted
date. Selected dates are marked with
a M icon. Repeat as desired to select
additional dates; to deselect a date,
highlight it and press 2.
2 Delete the pictures taken on the
selected dates.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
142 More About Playback
Menu Guide
Learn more about camera menus.
Defaults
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are
listed below.
Playback Menu Defaults
Option
Playback folder
Image review
After delete
After burst, show
Rotate tall
Slide show
Image type
Frame interval
Default
All
Off
Show next
Last image in burst
On
Still images and movies
2s
Photo Shooting Menu Defaults
Option
Default
Storage folder
Rename
Select folder by number
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
JPEG/TIFF
NEF (RAW)
Z 7: NCZ_7
Z 6: NCZ_6
100
DSC
FX (36×24)
JPEG normal
Large
Menu Guide > Defaults 143
Option
NEF (RAW) recording
NEF (RAW) compression
NEF (RAW) bit depth
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
b
P, S, A, M
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Maximum sensitivity
Maximum sensitivity with c
Minimum shutter speed
White balance
Fine-tuning
Choose color temperature
Preset manual
Set Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
Flash control
Flash control mode
Wireless flash options
Remote flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
144 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
Lossless compressed
14-bit
Auto
100
On
Z 7: 25600
Z 6: 51200
Same as without flash
Auto
Auto > Keep overall atmosphere
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K
d-1
Auto
sRGB
Off
Off
Normal
Normal
On
On
Off
Matrix metering
TTL
Off
Group flash
Fill flash
0.0
Option
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Vibration reduction
Auto bracketing
Auto bracketing set
Number of shots
Increment
Multiple exposure *
Multiple exposure mode
Number of shots
Overlay mode
Keep all exposures
Overlay shooting
HDR (high dynamic range)
HDR mode
Exposure differential
Smoothing
Save individual images (NEF)
Interval timer shooting
Choose start day/time
Interval
Intervals×shots/interval
Exposure smoothing
Silent photography
Interval priority
Starting storage folder
New folder
Reset file numbering
Default
Single AF
Single-point AF
(Varies with lens)
AE & flash bracketing
0
1.0
Off
2
Average
On
On
Off
Auto
Normal
Off
Now
1 minute
0001×1
Off
Off
Off
U
U
Menu Guide > Defaults 145
Option
Default
Time-lapse movie
Interval
5s
Shooting time
25 minutes
Exposure smoothing
On
Silent photography
Off
Choose image area
FX
Frame size/frame rate
1920×1080; 60p
Interval priority
Off
Focus shift shooting
No. of shots
100
Focus step width
5
Interval until next shot
0
First-frame exposure lock
On
Peaking stack image
Don’t create
Silent photography
Off
Starting storage folder
New folder
U
Reset file numbering
U
Silent photography
Off
* Photo shooting menu reset is not available while shooting is in progress.
Movie Shooting Menu Defaults
Option
File naming
Choose image area
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
146 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
DSC
FX
1920×1080; 60p
High quality
MOV
Option
ISO sensitivity settings
Maximum sensitivity
Auto ISO control (mode M)
ISO sensitivity (mode M)
White balance
Fine-tuning
Choose color temperature
Preset manual
Set Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Vibration reduction
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
Headphone volume
Timecode
Record timecodes
Count-up method
Drop frame
Default
Z 7: 25600
Z 6: 51200
On
100
Same as photo settings
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K
d-1
Same as photo settings
Off
Normal
Normal
On
On
Auto
Matrix metering
Full-time AF
Auto-area AF
Same as photo settings
Off
Auto
Disable
Wide range
Off
15
Off
Record run
On
Menu Guide > Defaults 147
Custom Settings Menu Defaults
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
a9
a10
a11
a12
a13
b1
b2
b3
b4
Option
AF-C priority selection
AF-S priority selection
Focus tracking with lock-on
Auto-area AF face/eye detection
Focus points used
Store points by orientation
AF activation
Limit AF-area mode selection
Pinpoint AF
Single-point AF
Dynamic-area AF
Wide-area AF (S)
Wide-area AF (L)
Auto-area AF
Focus point wrap-around
Focus point options
Manual focus mode
Dynamic-area AF assist
Low-light AF
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
Manual focus ring in AF mode
EV steps for exposure cntrl
Easy exposure compensation
Center-weighted area
Fine-tune optimal exposure
Matrix metering
Center-weighted metering
Spot metering
Highlight-weighted metering
148 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
Release
Focus
3
Face and eye detection on
All points
No
Shutter/AF-ON
M
M (cannot be deselected)
M
M
M
M
No wrap
On
On
Off
On
Enable
1/3 step
Off
ø 12 mm
0
0
0
0
Option
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L
c2 Self-timer
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
Interval between shots
c3 Power off delay
Playback
Menus
Image review
Standby timer
d1 CL mode shooting speed
d2 Max. continuous release
d3 Sync. release mode options
d4 Exposure delay mode
d5 Shutter type
d6 Limit selectable image area
FX (36×24)
DX (24×16)
5:4 (30×24) (Z 7 only)
1:1 (24×24)
16:9 (36×20)
d7 File number sequence
d8 Apply settings to live view
d9 Framing grid display
d10 Peaking highlights
Peaking level
Peaking highlight color
d11 View all in continuous mode
Default
Off
10 s
1
0.5 s
10 s
1 min
4s
30 s
3 fps
200
Sync
Off
Auto
M (cannot be deselected)
M
M
M
M
On
On
Off
Off
Red
On
Menu Guide > Defaults 149
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
e7
f1
Option
Flash sync speed
Flash shutter speed
Exposure comp. for flash
Auto c ISO sensitivity control
Modeling flash
Auto bracketing (mode M)
Bracketing order
Customize i menu
f2 Custom control assignment
Fn1 button
Fn2 button
AF-ON button
Sub-selector
Sub-selector center
Movie record button
Lens Fn button
Lens control ring
f3 OK button
Shooting mode
Playback mode
Zoom on/off
f4 Shutter spd & aperture lock
Shutter speed lock
Aperture lock
150 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
1/200 s
1/60 s
Entire frame
Subject and background
On
Flash/speed
MTR > under > over
Set Picture Control; White balance;
Image quality; Image size; Flash mode;
Metering; Wi-Fi connection;
Active D-Lighting; Release mode;
Vibration reduction; AF-area mode;
Focus mode
White balance
Focus mode/AF-area mode
AF-ON
Focus point selection
AE/AF lock
None
AE/AF lock
(Varies with lens)
Select center focus point
Zoom on/off
1 : 1 (100%)
Off
Option
f5 Customize command dials
Reverse rotation
Change main/sub
Menus and playback
Sub-dial frame advance
f6 Release button to use dial
f7 Reverse indicators
g1 Customize i menu
g2 Custom control assignment
Fn1 button
Fn2 button
AF-ON button
Sub-selector center
Shutter-release button
Lens control ring
g3 OK button
g4 AF speed
When to apply
g5 AF tracking sensitivity
g6 Highlight display
Display pattern
Highlight display threshold
Default
Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U
Exposure setting: Off
Autofocus setting: Off
Off
10 frames
No
Set Picture Control; White balance;
Frame size and rate/Image quality;
Microphone sensitivity;
Choose image area; Metering;
Wi-Fi connection; Active D-Lighting;
Electronic VR; Vibration reduction;
AF-area mode; Focus mode
White balance
Focus mode/AF-area mode
AF-ON
AE/AF lock
Take photos
(Varies with lens)
Select center focus point
0
Always
4
Off
248
Menu Guide > Defaults 151
Setup Menu Defaults
Option
Time zone and date
Daylight saving time
Monitor brightness
Monitor color balance
Viewfinder brightness
Viewfinder color balance
Control panel brightness
Limit monitor mode selection
Automatic display switch
Viewfinder only
Monitor only
Prioritize viewfinder
Information display
AF fine-tune
AF fine-tune (On/Off)
Clean image sensor
Automatic cleaning
Beep options
Beep on/off
Volume
Pitch
Touch controls
Enable/disable touch controls
Full-frame playback flicks
152 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
Off
0
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Auto
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Auto
M
M
M
M
Dark on light
Off
Clean at shutdown
Off
2
Low
Enable
Left V Right
Option
HDMI
Output resolution
Advanced
Output range
External recording control
Output data depth
N-Log setting
View assist
Location data
Standby timer
Set clock from satellite
Wireless remote (WR) options
LED lamp
Link mode
Assign remote (WR) Fn button
Airplane mode
Slot empty release lock
Default
Auto
Auto
Off
8 bit
Off
Off
Enable
Yes
On
Pairing
None
Disable
Enable release
Menu Guide > Defaults 153
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
To view playback options, select the D
tab in the camera menus.
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Image review
After delete
0
155
155
155
156
156
Option
After burst, show
Rotate tall
Slide show
Rating
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Playback Menu Defaults” (0 143).
154 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
0
157
157
158
159
Delete
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Delete multiple images.
Option
Description
Delete selected pictures.
Q Selected
i Select date Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
playback.
Playback Folder
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose a folder for playback.
Option
Description
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be
visible during playback. Folders can be renamed using
(Folder name)
the Storage folder > Rename option in the photo
shooting menu (0 161).
All
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during
Current
playback.
Playback Display Options
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose the information available in the playback photo
information display. Highlight options and press 2 to select or
deselect; items selected for display during full-frame playback are
indicated by L icons. To return to the playback menu, press J.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 155
Image Review
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose whether pictures are displayed automatically
immediately after shooting.
Option
Description
Pictures appear in the currently-selected display (monitor
On
or viewfinder) as they are taken.
Pictures are displayed after shooting only when the
On (monitor
monitor is used to frame shots. Pictures are not displayed
only)
in the viewfinder during shooting.
Off
Pictures can only be viewed by pressing the K button.
After Delete
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
S
T
U
Description
The following picture is displayed (if there is no
Show next following picture­—i.e., if the deleted image was the
last picture—the preceding picture will be displayed).
The preceding picture is displayed (if there is no
Show
preceding picture­—i.e., if the deleted image was the
previous
first picture—the next picture will be displayed).
If you were scrolling through pictures in the order
recorded, the following picture will be displayed as
Continue as described for Show next. If you were scrolling
before
through pictures in reverse order, the preceding
picture will be displayed as described for Show
previous.
156 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
After Burst, Show
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose whether the photo displayed immediately after a burst
of shots is taken in continuous release mode is the first or last
shot in the burst. This option takes effect only when Image
review (0 156) is off.
Most recent shot (burst)
DSC_0001.jpg
DSC_0002.jpg
DSC_0003.jpg
DSC_0004.jpg DSC_0014.jpg
Displayed if First image in
burst is selected
DSC_0015.jpg
Displayed if Last image in
burst is selected
Rotate Tall
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display during playback. Note that
because the camera itself is already in the appropriate
orientation during shooting, images are not rotated
automatically during image review.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 157
Slide Show
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
View a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
(0 155).
Option
Start
Description
Start slide show.
Choose the type of image displayed from Still images
and movies, Still images only, and Movies only, or
Image type select By rating to view only pictures with selected
ratings (highlight ratings and press 2 to select or
deselect).
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start
and press J. The following operations
can be performed while the show is in
progress:
• Skip back/skip ahead: Press 4 to return to
the previous frame, 2 to skip to the
next frame.
• View additional photo info: Press 1 or 3 to change or hide the
photo info displayed (still images only).
• Pause: Press J to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight
Restart and press J.
• Adjust volume: Press X during movie playback to increase the
volume, W (Q) to decrease.
• Exit to the playback menu: Press G to end the slide show and
return to the playback menu.
• Exit to playback mode: Press K to end the slide show and exit to
playback mode.
• Exit to shooting mode: Press the shutter-release button halfway to
return to shooting mode.
158 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
A dialog is displayed when the show
ends. Select Restart to restart or Exit to
return to the playback menu.
Rating
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Rate pictures or mark them as
candidates for later deletion. Press 4 or
2 to highlight pictures and press 1 or 3
to choose a rating of from zero to five
stars, or select d to mark the picture as a
candidate for later deletion (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button).
Press J to exit when the operation is complete.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 159
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To view the photo shooting menu,
select the C tab in the camera menus.
Option
Reset photo shooting menu
Storage folder
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
0
161
161
165
165
166
166
168
169
170
177
179
182
182
183
183
184
184
Option
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Vibration reduction
Auto bracketing
Multiple exposure
HDR (high dynamic range)
Interval timer shooting
Time-lapse movie
Focus shift shooting
Silent photography
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Photo Shooting Menu Defaults” (0 143).
160 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
0
184
185
185
186
188
189
189
189
189
190
200
207
212
223
231
237
Reset Photo Shooting Menu
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select Yes to restore photo shooting menu options to their
default values (0 143).
Storage Folder
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Rename folders and select the folder in which subsequent
pictures will be stored.
Folder
Folder number
Folder name
Rename
Folders are identified by a 5-character folder name preceded by
a 3-digit folder number assigned automatically by the camera.
The default folder name is “NCZ_7” (Z 7) or “NCZ_6” (Z 6); to
change the name assigned to new folders, select Rename. If
desired, the default name can be restored by pressing and
holding the O button while the keyboard is displayed. Existing
folders cannot be renamed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 161
D Text Entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required. Tap letters on the
screen or use the multi selector to highlight characters and press J to
insert them at the current cursor position (note that if a character is
entered when the field is full, the last character in the field will be
deleted). To delete the character under the cursor, press the O button.
To move the cursor to a new position, tap the display or rotate the
main command dial. To complete entry and return to the previous
menu, press X. To exit without completing text entry, press G.
Text display area
Keyboard area
162 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Select Folder by Number
To select folders by number or create a new folder with the
current folder name and a new folder number:
1 Choose Select folder by number.
Highlight Select folder by number and press 2.
2 Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and
press 1 or 3 to change. If a folder
with the selected number already
exists, one of the following icons will
be displayed:
• W: Folder is empty.
• X: Folder is partially full.
• Y: Folder contains 5000 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the main
menu (to exit without changing the storage folder, press the
G button). If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent
photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is
already full.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 163
Select Folder from List
To choose from a list of existing folders:
1 Choose Select folder from list.
Highlight Select folder from list and press 2.
2 Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3 Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
main menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the
selected folder.
D Folder and File Numbers
Once the folder number has reached 999, no new folders will be
created (and the shutter release will consequently be disabled) after
the file number reaches 9999 or the number of files in the folder
reaches 5000, or if you attempt to record a movie when the camera
calculates that the number of files needed for a movie of maximum
length would result in the creation of a file numbered higher than 9999
or the folder holding over 5000 files. To continue shooting, create a
folder with a number less than 999 or try changing the options
selected for Frame size/frame rate and Movie quality.
D Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
164 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
File Naming
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or,
in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space
(0 182), “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a threeletter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG” or “_DSC0002.JPG”). The
File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the
“DSC” portion of the file name as described in “Text Entry”
(0 162).
D Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF”
for TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.MOV” for MOV movies,
“.MP4” for MP4 movies, and “.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each
pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of NEF
(RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but
different extensions.
Choose Image Area
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The camera offers a choice of the following image areas:
Option
c FX (36×24)
a DX (24×16)
b 5 : 4 (30×24)
m 1 : 1 (24×24)
Z 16 : 9 (36×20)
Description
Images are recorded in FX format with an angle of
view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a 35 mm
format camera.
Images are recorded in DX format. To calculate the
approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm
format, multiply by 1.5.
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4
(Z 7 only).
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 165
Image Quality
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see
“Image Quality” (0 104).
Image Size
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the size, in pixels, of photographs recorded with the
camera. Select JPEG/TIFF to choose the size of JPEG and TIFF
images, NEF (RAW) to choose the size of NEF (RAW) images.
Z 7:
Option
Size (pixels)
Print size (cm/in.) *
Large
8256 × 5504
69.9 × 46.6/27.5 × 18.3
FX (36×24)
Medium
6192 × 4128
52.4 × 35.0/20.6 × 13.8
FX format
Small
4128 × 2752
35.0 × 23.3/13.8 × 9.2
Large
5408 × 3600
45.8 × 30.5/18.0 × 12.0
DX (24×16)
Medium
4048 × 2696
34.3 × 22.8/13.5 × 9.0
DX format
Small
2704 × 1800
22.9 × 15.2/9.0 × 6.0
Large
6880 × 5504
58.3 × 46.6/22.9 × 18.3
5 : 4 (30×24)
Medium
5152 × 4120
43.6 × 34.9/17.2 × 13.7
Small
3440 × 2752
29.1 × 23.3/11.5 × 9.2
Large
5504 × 5504
46.6 × 46.6/18.3 × 18.3
1 : 1 (24×24)
Medium
4128 × 4128
35.0 × 35.0/13.8 × 13.8
Small
2752 × 2752
23.3 × 23.3/9.2 × 9.2
Large
8256 × 4640
69.9 × 39.3/27.5 × 15.5
16 : 9 (36×20)
Medium
6192 × 3480
52.4 × 29.5/20.6 × 11.6
Small
4128 × 2320
35.0 × 19.6/13.8 × 7.7
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Image area
166 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Z 6:
Option
Size (pixels)
Print size (cm/in.) *
Large
6048 × 4024
51.2 × 34.1/20.2 × 13.4
FX (36×24)
Medium
4528 × 3016
38.3 × 25.5/15.1 × 10.1
FX format
Small
3024 × 2016
25.6 × 17.1/10.1 × 6.7
Large
3936 × 2624
33.3 × 22.2/13.1 × 8.7
DX (24×16)
Medium
2944 × 1968
24.9 × 16.7/9.8 × 6.6
DX format
Small
1968 × 1312
16.7 × 11.1/6.6 × 4.4
Large
4016 × 4016
34.0 × 34.0/13.4 × 13.4
1 : 1 (24×24)
Medium
3008 × 3008
25.5 × 25.5/10.0 × 10.0
Small
2000 × 2000
16.9 × 16.9/6.7 × 6.7
Large
6048 × 3400
51.2 × 28.8/20.2 × 11.3
16 : 9 (36×20)
Medium
4528 × 2544
38.3 × 21.5/15.1 × 8.5
Small
3024 × 1696
25.6 × 14.4/10.1 × 5.7
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Image area
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 167
NEF (RAW) Recording
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose a compression type and bit depth for NEF (RAW)
photographs.
NEF (RAW) Compression
Use compression to reduce file size.
Option
N
O
Description
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
Lossless
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40% with
compressed
no effect on image quality.
NEF images are compressed using a non-reversible
Compressed algorithm, reducing file size by about 35–55% with
almost no effect on image quality.
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.
NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
Bit depth determines the depth of color data recorded.
Option
q 12-bit
r 14-bit
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
14 bits, producing files larger than those with a bit
depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data
recorded.
168 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs.
Option
Description
Adjust ISO sensitivity. Select from values between ISO 64
and 25600 (or in the case of the Z 6, between ISO 100 and
ISO 51200). Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV below the
ISO sensitivity
lowest of these values and 0.3 to 2 EV above the highest
are also available for special situations. b mode offers an
additional Auto option.
If On is selected, the camera will automatically adjust ISO
sensitivity when optimal exposure cannot be achieved at
the value selected for ISO sensitivity. The options listed
below are available for fine-tuning auto ISO sensitivity
control.
• Maximum sensitivity: Choose an upper limit for ISO
Auto ISO
sensitivity to prevent it being raised too high.
sensitivity
• Maximum sensitivity with c: Choose the upper ISO
control
sensitivity limit for photos taken using an optional flash
unit.
• Minimum shutter speed: Choose the shutter speed below
which auto ISO sensitivity control will kick in to prevent
underexposure in modes P and A. Options range from
1/4000 s to 30 s. An Auto option is also available (0 170).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 169
A “Minimum Shutter Speed” > “Auto”
If Auto is selected for Auto ISO sensitivity control > Minimum
shutter speed, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed
based on the focal length of the lens. For example, the camera will
automatically select fast minimum shutter speeds to reduce the blur
that commonly occurs with telephoto lenses.
Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned for faster or slower
minimum values by highlighting Auto and pressing 2; choosing fast
minimum shutter speeds when photographing fast-moving objects
reduces blur.
Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimum
exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for
Maximum sensitivity.
White Balance
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust white balance. For more
information, see the “White Balance”
sections in “Basic Settings” (0 63) and
“The i Menu” (0 98).
170 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
The White Balance Menu: Fine-Tuning
Fine-tuning is available via the camera menus. For more
information on fine-tuning, see “Fine-Tuning White Balance”
(0 99). For information on fine-tuning preset manual white
balance, see “Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance” (0 176).
1 Display fine-tuning options.
Go to White balance in the photo
shooting menu, highlight a white
balance option, and press 2.
2 Fine-tune white balance.
Coordinates
Use the multi selector to fine-tune
white balance. White balance can be
fine-tuned on the Amber–Blue axis in
steps of 0.5 and the Green–Magenta
axis in steps of 0.25. The horizontal
(Amber–Blue) axis corresponds to
Adjustment
color temperature, while the vertical
(Green–Magenta) axis has the similar
effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters.
The horizontal axis is ruled in increments equivalent to about
5 mired, the vertical axis in increments of about 0.05 diffuse
density units.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 171
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save settings and return to
the photo shooting menu. If white
balance has been fine-tuned, an
asterisk (“U”) will appear next to the
white balance icon in the shooting
display.
D White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make
photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
D “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference
in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
172 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
The White Balance Menu: Choosing a Color
Temperature
Color temperature can be selected using the White balance >
Choose color temperature option in the photo shooting menu.
Enter values for the amber–blue and green–magenta axes as
described below.
1 Select Choose color temperature.
Go to White balance in the photo shooting menu, highlight
Choose color temperature and press 2.
2 Select values for amber–blue and green–magenta.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the Amber–Blue or
Green–Magenta axis and press 1 or 3 to change.
Value for
Amber–Blue axis
Value for
Green–Magenta axis
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save settings and return to
the photo shooting menu. If a value
other than zero is selected for the
Green–Magenta axis, an asterisk (“U”)
will appear next to the white balance
icon in the shooting display.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 173
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with fluorescent
lighting. Choose I (Fluorescent) for fluorescent light sources. With
other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is
appropriate.
174 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Preset Manual: Copying White Balance from a
Photograph
The Preset manual option in the white balance menu can be
used to copy a white balance value from an existing photograph.
For more information on preset manual white balance, see
“Preset Manual” (0 101).
1 Select Preset manual.
Go to White balance in the photo
shooting menu, highlight Preset
manual, and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1
to d-6) and press X.
3 Choose Select image.
The preset manual white balance
menu will be displayed; highlight
Select image and press 2.
4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To view
the highlighted image full frame,
press and hold the X button.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 175
5 Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value from the highlighted
photograph to the selected preset. If the highlighted
photograph has a comment, the comment will be copied to
the comment for the selected preset.
D Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The current preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting Fine-tune in the preset manual
white balance menu and adjusting white
balance as described in “The White Balance
Menu: Fine-Tuning” (0 171).
D Edit Comment
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36
characters for the current white-balance
preset, select Edit comment in the preset
manual white balance menu.
D Protect
To protect the current white-balance preset,
select Protect in the preset manual white
balance menu, then highlight On and press
J. Protected presets cannot be modified
and the Fine-tune and Edit comment
options cannot be used.
176 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Set Picture Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose how new photos will be processed. For more
information, see “Set Picture Control” (0 94).
Set Picture Control: Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls can be modified to
suit the scene or the user’s creative intent.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control
in the Picture Control list and press 2.
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a
value in increments of 1, or rotate the
sub-command dial to choose a value
in increments of 0.25 (the options
available vary with the Picture Control selected). To quickly
adjust levels for balanced Sharpening, Mid-range
sharpening, and Clarity, highlight Quick sharp and press 4
or 2. Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted.
Default settings can be restored by pressing the O button.
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes and return to the Picture Control list.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 177
D Custom Picture Controls
Modifications to existing Picture Controls can be saved as custom
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
photo or movie shooting menu. Custom Picture Controls can be
copied to a memory card and used in compatible software or shared
among cameras of the same model.
D The i Menu
Modifying Picture Controls from the i menu
allows the effect to be previewed in the
display. Highlight Set Picture Control in the
i menu and press J, then press 4 and 2 to
choose a Picture Control and press 3 to
display Picture Control settings.
178 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Manage Picture Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
Option
Save/edit
Rename
Delete
Load/save
Description
Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing
preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom
Picture Controls.
Rename custom Picture Controls.
Delete custom Picture Controls.
Use the following options to copy custom Picture
Controls to and from the memory card. Once copied to
the memory card, Picture Controls can be used with other
cameras or compatible software.
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the
memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through
C-9 on the camera and name them as desired.
• Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture Controls
from the memory card.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through
C-9) from the camera to a selected destination
(1 through 99) on the memory card.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 179
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified
and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1 Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
2 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control
and press 2, or press J to proceed to
Step 4 to save a copy of the
highlighted Picture Control without
further modification.
3 Edit the selected Picture Control.
To abandon any changes and start
over from default settings, press the
O button. Press J when settings are
complete.
4 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
180 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
5 Name the Picture Control.
A text-entry dialog will be displayed. By default, new Picture
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned
automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control; to
choose a different name, rename the Picture Control as
described in “Text Entry” (0 162). Tap the keyboard selection
button to cycle through the upper-case, lower-case, and
symbol keyboards. Custom Picture Control names can be up
to nineteen characters long. Any characters after the
nineteenth will be deleted.
Name area
Keyboard area
Keyboard selection
D Custom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
D The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which
the custom Picture Control is based is
indicated by an icon in the top right corner
of the edit display.
Original
Picture Control icon
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 181
Color Space
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for
color reproduction. sRGB is recommended for general-purpose
printing and display, Adobe RGB, with its broader gamut of
colors, for professional publication and commercial printing.
D Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require
applications, displays, and printers that support color management.
D Color Space
ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D automatically select the correct color
space when opening photographs created with this camera. Results
cannot be guaranteed with third-party software.
Active D-Lighting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures
with natural contrast. For more information, see “Active
D-Lighting” (0 110).
182 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Long Exposure NR
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots
or fog). The time required for processing
roughly doubles; during processing, the
message “Performing noise reduction“
will be displayed, “Job NR” will flash in the
control panel, and pictures cannot be
taken (if the camera is turned off before
processing is complete, the picture will
be saved but noise reduction will not be
performed). In continuous release mode,
frame rates will slow and while photographs are being
processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will drop.
High ISO NR
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce “noise”.
Option
High/
Normal/
Low
Off
Description
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels), particularly
in pictures taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the
amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,
and Low.
Noise reduction is performed only as required and never at
an amount as high as when Low is selected.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 183
Vignette Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Vignette control reduces the drop in brightness that occurs at
the edges of the frame. Its effects vary from lens to lens and are
most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High,
Normal, Low, and Off.
D Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF
and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls
that have been modified from default settings may not produce the
desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the display.
Diffraction Compensation
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high
f/-numbers).
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On as required to reduce barrel distortion when shooting
with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion
when shooting with long lenses (note that On may be selected
automatically with some lenses, in which case the Auto
distortion control option will be grayed out and unavailable).
184 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Flicker Reduction Shooting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
When On is selected, the camera will time photographs to
reduce banding, areas of under- or over-exposure, or (in
photographs taken in continuous release modes) uneven
coloration caused by the flicker of such light sources as
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps (note that the frame rate
may drop while flicker reduction is in effect, and that the frame
rate may slow or become erratic during burst shooting).
D “Flicker Reduction Shooting” in the Photo Shooting Menu
Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated
respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). Flicker may not
be detected or the desired results may not be achieved with dark
backgrounds, bright light sources, or decorative lighting displays and
other non-standard lighting. Depending on the light source, there may
be a slight delay before the shutter is released. The desired results may
not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during
shooting.
Flicker detection will not take effect at shutter speeds slower than
/ s (including Bulb and Time) or when Continuous H (extended) is
selected for release mode or silent photography, HDR, or exposure
delay mode is enabled.
1 100
Metering
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. For more
information, see “Metering” (0 108).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 185
Flash Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust settings for wireless remote flash units (0 362) or
optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe
(0 349).
Flash Control Mode
Choose a flash control mode and flash
level and adjust other settings for
SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash
units mounted on the camera accessory
shoe (settings for an SB-5000 mounted
on the accessory shoe can also be
adjusted using the controls on the flash unit, while settings for
other flash units can only be adjusted using flash unit controls).
The options available under Flash control mode vary with the
mode selected.
• TTL: i-TTL mode. Flash level is adjusted automatically in
response to shooting conditions.
• Auto external flash: In this mode, output is adjusted automatically
according to the amount of light reflected by the subject.
• Distance-priority manual: Choose the distance to the subject; flash
output will be adjusted automatically.
• Manual: Choose the flash level manually.
• Repeating flash: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is
open, producing a multiple-exposure effect.
186 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Wireless Flash Options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless
control of multiple remote flash units.
This option is available only when an
SB-5000 or SB-500 flash unit or a WR-R10
wireless remote controller is mounted
on the camera.
Option
Y
Y/Z
Z
Description
The remote flash units are controlled using lowOptical AWL intensity flashes emitted by the master flash
(0 375).
Optical/
Choose this option when using both opticallyradio AWL
and radio-controlled flash units (0 383).
The remote flash units are controlled by radio
Radio AWL signals from a WR-R10 attached to the camera
(0 364).
Off
Remote flash photography disabled.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 187
Remote Flash Control
Choose from the remote flash
photography options listed below
(0 368, 375).
Option
Group flash
Quick
wireless
control
Remote
repeating
Description
Choose a separate flash control mode for each group of
remote flash units.
Choose the balance between groups A and B and set the
output for group C manually.
The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open,
producing a multiple-exposure effect.
Radio Remote Flash Info
View the flash units currently controlled
via radio AWL.
Flash Mode
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the flash mode for wireless remote flash units or flash
units mounted on the camera accessory shoe. For more
information, see “Flash Mode” (0 107, 354).
188 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Flash Compensation
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust flash output to control the brightness of the main subject
relative to the background (0 356). Flash output can be
increased to make the main subject appear brighter or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
Focus Mode
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more
information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (0 52).
AF-Area Mode
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus.
For more information, see “AF-Area Mode” (0 54).
Vibration Reduction
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction. For more
information, see “Vibration Reduction” (0 112).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 189
Auto Bracketing
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Vary exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white
balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value.
Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the right
settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and
adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different
settings for the same subject. The following options are
available:
• Auto bracketing set: Choose the setting or settings bracketed
when auto bracketing is in effect. Choose AE & flash
bracketing to perform both exposure and flash-level
bracketing, AE bracketing to bracket only exposure,
Flash bracketing to perform only flash-level bracketing,
WB bracketing to perform white-balance bracketing, or
ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active
D-Lighting.
• Number of shots: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence.
• Increment: Choose the amount the selected settings vary with
each shot (ADL bracketing excluded).
• Amount: Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot
(ADL bracketing only).
190 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
Vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs.
Exposure modified by:
0 EV
Exposure modified by:
–1 EV
Exposure modified by:
+1 EV
1 Choose the bracketing type.
Select an option for Auto bracketing set. Choose AE & flash
bracketing to vary both exposure and flash level, AE
bracketing to vary only exposure, or Flash bracketing to
vary only flash level. Note that flash bracketing is available in
i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture (qA) flash control
modes only (0 408).
2 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and
press 4 or 2 to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than 0F, a bracketing
icon will appear in the display.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 191
3 Choose a bracketing increment.
Highlight Increment and press 4 or
2 to choose the bracketing
increment. At default settings, the
size of the increment can be chosen
from 0.3 (1/3), 0.7 (2/3), 1, 2, and 3 EV.
The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 (1/3) EV are
listed below.
“Number of
shots”
0F
+3F
−3F
+2F
−2F
3F
5F
7F
9F
Bracketing indicator No. of shots
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0
3
0/+0.3/+0.7
3
0/–0.7/–0.3
2
0/+0.3
2
0/–0.3
3
0/–0.3/+0.3
5
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
7
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
9
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
Note that for exposure increments of 2 EV or more, the
maximum number of shots is 5; if a higher value was selected
in Step 2, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.
192 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level
shot-by-shot according to the bracketing
program selected; the modified values for shutter
speed and aperture are shown in the display. Modifications to
exposure are added to those made with exposure
compensation.
While bracketing is in effect, the display shows a bracketing
icon, a bracketing progress indicator, and the number of
shots remaining in the bracketing sequence. After each shot,
a segment will disappear from the indicator and the number
of shots remaining will be reduced by one.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 193
D Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting
will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted
to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
D Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If On is
selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in
modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for
optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are
exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity
control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then
bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed. Custom Setting e6
(Auto bracketing (mode M)) can be used to change how the camera
performs exposure and flash bracketing in mode M: by varying flash
level together with shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash
level alone.
194 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each
with a different white balance.
1 Choose WB bracketing.
Select WB bracketing for Auto bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and
press 4 or 2 to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than 0F, a bracketing
icon will appear in the display.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 195
3 Choose a bracketing increment.
Highlight Increment and press 4 or
2 to choose the bracketing
increment. Each increment is roughly
equivalent to 5 mired. Choose from
increments of 1 (5 mired),
2 (10 mired), or 3 (15 mired). Higher B values correspond to
increased amounts of blue, higher A values to increased
amounts of amber. The bracketing programs with an
increment of 1 are listed below.
“Number of
shots”
0F
B3F
A3F
B2F
A2F
3F
5F
Bracketing indicator
No. of
shots Increment
0
1
3
1B
3
1A
2
1B
2
1A
3
5
7F
7
9F
9
196 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
1A, 1B
Bracketing order
0
0/B1/B2
0/A2/A1
0/B1
0/A1
0/A1/B1
0/A2/A1/B1/B2
0/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3
0/A4/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3/B4
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number
of copies specified in the bracketing program, and
each copy will have a different white balance.
Modifications to white balance are added to the white
balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater
than the number of exposures remaining, the shutter release
will be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory
card is inserted.
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots.
D White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option cancels
white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amberblue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display). No adjustments are
made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the bracketing
program will be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting c2 (Self-timer) > Number of
shots.
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 197
ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.
1 Choose ADL bracketing.
Select ADL bracketing for Auto bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and
press 4 or 2 to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Choose two shots to take one
photograph with Active D-Lighting
off and another at the value selected in Step 3. Choose three
to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active
D-Lighting set to Off, Low, and Normal (three shots), Off,
Low, Normal, and High (four shots), or Off, Low, Normal,
High, and Extra high (five shots). If you choose more than
two shots, proceed to Step 4.
At settings other than 0F, a bracketing
icon will appear in the display.
3 Choose a value for Active
D-Lighting.
Highlight Amount and press 4 or 2
to choose an option. The chosen
setting applies when 2F is selected for
Number of shots.
198 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Bracketing
order
Amount
OFF L
Off/Low
OFF N
Off/Normal
OFF H
Off/High
OFF H+ Off/Extra high
OFF AUTO
Off/Auto
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-byshot according to the bracketing program
selected.
While bracketing is in effect, the
display shows an ADL bracketing
icon and the number of shots
remaining in the bracketing
sequence. After each shot, the
number of shots remaining will be
reduced by one.
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots.
D ADL Bracketing
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting
will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted
to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 199
Multiple Exposure
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
The following options are available:
• Multiple exposure mode: Choose from On (series) (take a series of
multiple exposures, ending when Off is selected), On (single
photo) (take one multiple exposure), or Off (exit without
creating additional multiple exposures).
• Number of shots: Choose the number of exposures that will be
combined to form a single photograph.
• Overlay mode: Choose from the options below.
- Add: The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is
not adjusted.
- Average: Before the exposures are overlaid, the gain for each is
divided by the total number of exposures (the gain for each
exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc).
- Lighten: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and
uses only the brightest.
+
- Darken: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and
uses only the darkest.
+
200 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
• Keep all exposures: Choose On to save the individual shots that
make up each multiple exposure, Off to discard the individual
shots and save only the multiple exposure.
• Overlay shooting: If On is selected, earlier exposures will be
superimposed on the view through the lens during shooting.
• Select first exposure (NEF): Choose the first exposure from the NEF
(RAW) images on the memory card.
Creating a Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to shoot a multiple exposure.
1 Select Multiple exposure.
Highlight Multiple exposure in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure mode
and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to
choose the desired mode and press
J to select.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, an icon will appear in the
display.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 201
3 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press
2. Press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of exposures that will be
combined to form a single
photograph and press J.
4 Choose the overlay mode.
Highlight Overlay mode and press
2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the
desired mode and press J to select.
5 Choose whether to keep individual
exposures.
To choose whether to keep or delete
the individual shots that make up the
multiple exposure, highlight Keep all
exposures and press 2, then press 1
or 3 to choose the desired option and press J to select.
6 Choose whether to view progress in
the display.
To choose whether earlier exposures
are superimposed over the view
through the lens as shooting
progresses, highlight Overlay
shooting and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the
desired option and press J to select.
202 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
7 Choose the first exposure.
To choose the first exposure from
existing photos taken with Large
selected for Image size > NEF (RAW)
in the photo shooting menu,
highlight Select first exposure (NEF)
and press 2. Use the multi selector to highlight the desired
image and press J to select (to view the highlighted image
full screen, press and hold the X button).
8 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Continue shooting until all
exposures have been taken and the
final photograph has been recorded
(if you selected an existing NEF
(RAW) image as the first exposure in
Step 7, shooting will start from the
second exposure). If On (single
photo) was selected in Step 2,
multiple exposure shooting will end when the photo is
recorded; otherwise, you can continue taking multiple
exposures until multiple exposure shooting is turned off.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 203
D Release Mode
In continuous release modes, the camera records all exposures in a
single burst. If On (series) is selected, a new multiple exposure will
start as each previous multiple exposure ends; if On (single photo) is
selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first multiple
exposure is recorded. In self-timer mode, the camera will automatically
record the number of exposures selected in Step 3, regardless of the
option selected for Custom Setting c2 (Self-timer) > Number of
shots; the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom
Setting c2 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other release
modes, one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release
button is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been
recorded.
D Image Quality
Multiple exposures shot with an NEF (RAW) option selected for image
quality will be recorded in JPEG finem format.
204 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
The i Menu
The options listed below can be
accessed during multiple exposure
shooting by pressing the K button
followed by the i button. Highlight
items and press J to select.
• View progress: View a preview created
from the exposures recorded to the
current point.
• Retake last exposure: Retake the most
recent exposure.
• Save and exit: Create a multiple exposure
from the exposures taken to current
point.
• Discard and exit: Exit without recording a multiple exposure. If On
is selected for Keep all exposures, the individual exposures
will be kept.
D Multiple Exposure
Shooting may also end if camera settings are changed before the
exposure is complete. The shooting settings and photo info for
multiple exposure photographs are those for the first exposure.
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
Multiple exposures may be affected by noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines).
D Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards cannot be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and cannot be
changed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 205
Ending Multiple Exposures
To end a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have
been taken, select Off for Multiple
exposure mode or press the K button
followed by the i button and select
either Save and exit or Discard and
exit. If shooting ends or you select Save and exit before the
specified number of exposures have been taken, a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been
recorded to that point. If Average is selected for Overlay mode,
gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually
recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if the
standby timer expires.
D The Standby Timer
Menus and playback can be used between exposures, but note that if
no operations are performed for about 40 seconds during playback or
90 seconds while menus are displayed, shooting will end and a
multiple exposure will be created from the exposures recorded to that
point. The time available to record the next exposure can be extended
by choosing longer times for Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay) >
Playback and Menus.
206 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
HDR (High Dynamic Range)
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two
shots taken at different exposures. HDR is most effective when
used with matrix metering (with spot or center-weighted
metering, an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent to about
2 EV). It cannot be combined with some camera features,
including NEF (RAW) recording, flash photography, bracketing,
multiple exposure, shutter speeds of Bulb and Time, or interval
timer, focus shift, or time-lapse recording.
+
First exposure (darker)
Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR image
The following options are available:
• HDR mode: Choose from On (series) (take a series of HDR
photographs, ending when Off is selected), On (single photo)
(take one HDR photograph), and Off (exit without taking
additional HDR photographs).
• Exposure differential: Choose the difference in exposure between
the two shots that are combined to make an HDR photograph.
Choose larger values for high-contrast subjects, or select Auto
to let the camera adjust the exposure differential according to
the scene.
• Smoothing: Choose how much to smooth the boundaries
between the shots that make up each HDR photograph.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 207
• Save individual images (NEF): Choose On to save each of the
individual shots used to create the HDR image. The photos are
saved as large-size NEF (RAW) files regardless of the options
selected for image quality and size in the photo shooting
menu.
208 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Taking HDR Photographs
Follow the steps below to shoot HDR photographs.
1 Select HDR (high dynamic range).
Highlight HDR (high dynamic
range) in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
2 Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and press 2.
Highlight one of the following and
press J.
• To take a series of HDR photographs,
select 0 On (series). HDR
shooting will continue until you
select Off for HDR mode.
• To take one HDR photograph, select On (single photo). Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, an icon will appear in the
display.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 209
3 Choose the exposure differential.
To choose the difference in exposure
between the two shots, highlight
Exposure differential and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
Choose higher values for highcontrast subjects, but note that
choosing a value higher than
required may not produce the desired
results; if Auto is selected, the camera
will automatically adjust exposure to suit the scene.
4 Choose the amount of smoothing.
To choose how much the boundaries
between the two images are
smoothed, highlight Smoothing and
press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
Higher values produce a smoother
composite image. Uneven shading
may be visible with some subjects.
210 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
5 Choose whether to keep individual
exposures.
To choose whether to save the
individual NEF (RAW) images that
make up the HDR photograph,
highlight Save individual images
(NEF) and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired
option and press J to select.
6 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera takes two exposures
when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down. “Job” and
“HDR” will flash in the control panel
while the images are combined; no photographs can be
taken until recording is complete. Regardless of the option
currently selected for release mode, only one photograph will
be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken.
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image will be cropped out. The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use
of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, shadows may
appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark
objects; this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of
smoothing.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 211
Interval Timer Shooting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified
number of shots has been recorded. Select a release mode other
than Self-timer (E) when using the interval timer.
Selecting Interval timer shooting displays the options below.
• Start: Start interval timer shooting, either after 3 s (Now
selected for Choose start day/time) or at a selected date and
time (Choose day/time). Shooting will continue at the
selected interval until all shots have been taken.
• Choose start day/time: Choose a start option. To start shooting
immediately, select Now. To start shooting at a chosen date
and time, select Choose day/time.
• Interval: Choose the interval (hours, minutes, and seconds)
between shots.
• Intervals×shots/interval: Choose the number of intervals and the
number of shots per interval.
• Exposure smoothing: Selecting On allows the camera to adjust
exposure to match previous shot in modes other than M (note
that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto
ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject
brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations
in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the
interval between shots.
• Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during
shooting.
212 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
• Interval priority: Select On to ensure that photos shot in modes P
and A are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that
photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, check that the
minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings >
Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is
faster than the interval and that Release is chosen for Custom
Setting a1(AF-C priority selection) or Custom Setting a2 (AF-S
priority selection) according to the focus mode currently
selected.
• Starting storage folder: Highlight options and press 2 to select or
deselect. Choose New folder to create a new folder for each
new sequence, Reset file numbering to reset file numbering
to 0001 when a new folder is created.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 213
Interval Timer Photography
D Before Shooting
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at
current settings and view the results. We recommend using a tripod
and selecting Off for Vibration reduction in the photo shooting
menu. Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in
the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the
correct time and date. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be
sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery
before use or use an AC adapter and power connector (available
separately).
1 Select Interval timer shooting.
Highlight Interval timer shooting in
the photo shooting menu and press 2.
Interval timer shooting options will
be displayed.
214 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
2 Adjust interval timer settings.
Adjust the following settings:
• Choose start day/time: Choose the starting date and time.
Highlight Choose start day/
time and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start shooting
at a chosen date and time, select Choose day/time, then
choose the date and time and press J.
• Interval: Choose the interval, in hours, minutes, and seconds.
Highlight Interval and press 2.
Choose an interval and press J.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 215
• Intervals×shots/interval: Choose the number of intervals and
the number of shots per interval.
Highlight Intervals×shots/
interval and press 2.
Choose the number of intervals
and shots/interval and press J.
In single frame release mode, the photographs for each
interval will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting
d1 (CL mode shooting speed). When silent photography is
enabled, the number of shots per interval is fixed at one.
• Exposure smoothing: Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight Exposure smoothing
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Silent photography: Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight Silent photography
and press 2.
216 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Interval priority: Enable or disable Interval priority.
Highlight Interval priority and
press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
If On is selected, interval timer photography will end if the
camera cannot focus or the shutter release is otherwise
disabled.
• Starting storage folder: Choose starting folder options.
Highlight Starting storage
folder and press 2.
Highlight options and press 2
to select or deselect; press J to
proceed.
3 Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J. The first series of shots will be
taken at the specified starting time, or after about 3 s if Now
was selected for Choose start day/time in Step 2. The display
turns off during shooting; shooting will continue at the
selected interval until all shots have been taken.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 217
D During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the
memory card access lamp will flash.
If the display is turned on by pressing the
shutter-release button halfway, the
message “Interval timer shooting“ will be
displayed and the Q icon will flash.
Settings can be adjusted, the menus used,
and pictures played back while interval
timer photography is in progress. The
display will turn off automatically shortly before each interval. Note
that changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may
cause shooting to end.
218 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing J (Now selected for Choose start day/time) or
selecting Pause in the interval timer menu (Choose day/time
selected for Choose start day/time).
❚❚ Resuming Interval Timer Photography
To resume shooting immediately, select Restart.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
To resume shooting at a specified time:
In the interval timer
menu, highlight
Choose day/time and
press 2.
Choose a starting date
and time and press J.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting
To end interval timer photography before all the photos are
taken, select Off in the interval timer menu.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 219
❚❚ No Photograph
Photographs will not be taken at the selected interval if the
current interval ends before the photograph or photographs for
the previous interval have been taken, the memory card is full, or
AF-S is selected and the camera is unable to focus (note that the
camera focuses before each shot). If Off is selected for Interval
priority in autofocus mode, shooting will resume with the next
interval.
220 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting after deleting some pictures
or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
D Interval Timer Photography
Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected
number of shots and, if you are using a flash, the time needed for the
flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the number of photos taken
may be less than the total listed in Step 2 (the number of intervals
multiplied by the number of shots per interval) or the flash may fire at
less than the power needed for full exposure. Interval timer
photography will not start if the interval is set to 00:00’0.5” and both
Silent photography and Interval priority are enabled. Interval timer
photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including movie recording, time-lapse movies, long time-exposures
(bulb or time photography), multiple exposure, HDR (high dynamic
range), and focus shift. Note that because the shutter speed, frame
rate, and time needed to record images may vary from one interval to
the next, the time between the end of one interval and the beginning
of the next may vary. If shooting cannot proceed or changes cannot be
applied at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of Bulb or
Time is currently selected in mode M, the interval is zero, or the start
time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed.
Interval timer shooting will pause when Self-timer (E) is selected for
release mode or if the camera is turned off and then on again (when
the camera is off, batteries and memory cards can be replaced without
ending interval timer photography). Pausing shooting does not affect
interval timer settings.
D Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 221
D Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in
the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of
shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing
is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will
take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of
copies specified in the bracketing program. Note that bracketing
cannot be used during interval timer photography when On is
selected for Interval priority.
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features,
including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2
• Flash photography
• Exposure delay mode
• Flicker reduction
• Bracketing
222 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Time-Lapse Movie
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to
create a silent time-lapse movie.
Selecting Time-lapse movie displays the options below.
• Start: Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3 s
and continues at the selected interval for the selected shooting
time.
• Interval: Choose the interval between shots in minutes and
seconds.
• Shooting time: Choose how long the camera will continue to take
pictures (hours and minutes).
• Exposure smoothing: Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in
exposure in modes other than M (note that exposure
smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity
control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during
shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in
which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval
between shots.
• Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during
shooting.
• Choose image area: Choose an image area (FX or DX).
• Frame size/frame rate: Choose the frame size and rate for the final
movie. The options are those for Frame size/frame rate in the
movie shooting menu.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 223
• Interval priority: Select On to ensure that frames shot in modes P
and A are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that
photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, check that the
minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings >
Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is
faster than the interval and that Release is chosen for Custom
Setting a1(AF-C priority selection) or Custom Setting a2 (AF-S
priority selection) according to the focus mode currently
selected.
224 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Recording Time-Lapse Movies
D Before Shooting
Before shooting a time-lapse movie, select Time zone and date in the
setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct
time and date, and then take a test shot at current settings and view
the results. Time-lapse movies are shot using the movie crop; to check
the composition, press the X button in the Time-lapse movie display
(to return to the Time-lapse movie display, press the W/Q button).
For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than
4 (auto) or D (natural light auto).
We recommend using a tripod and selecting Off for Vibration
reduction in the photo shooting menu. To ensure that shooting is not
interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt,
charge the battery before use or use an AC adapter and power
connector (available separately).
1 Select Time-lapse movie.
Highlight Time-lapse movie in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
Time-lapse movie options will be
displayed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 225
2 Adjust time-lapse movie settings.
Adjust the following settings:
• Interval: The interval (in minutes and seconds) should be
longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed.
Highlight Interval and
press 2.
Choose an interval and press J.
• Shooting time: The total shooting time (in hours and minutes)
can be up to 7 hours and 59 minutes.
Highlight Shooting time and
press 2.
Choose a shooting time and
press J.
• Exposure smoothing: Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight Exposure smoothing
and press 2.
226 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Silent photography: Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight Silent photography
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Choose image area: Choose an image area for time-lapse
recording.
Highlight Choose image area
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Frame size/frame rate: Choose the frame size and rate at which
the final movie will play back.
Highlight Frame size/
frame rate and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 227
• Interval priority: Enable or disable Interval priority.
Highlight Interval priority and
press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
If On is selected, time-lapse recording will end if the camera
cannot focus or the shutter release is otherwise disabled.
3 Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J.
Shooting starts after about 3 s. The
display turns off and the camera takes
photographs at the selected interval
for the selected shooting time.
D During Shooting
During shooting, the time-lapse recording
indicator will be displayed in the control
panel and the memory card access lamp will
light. Regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting c3 (Power off delay,
0 260) > Standby timer, the standby timer
will not expire during shooting.
To end shooting (0 229) or view such
settings as exposure smoothing, the
interval, and the time remaining, press the
G button between shots (the time-lapse
movie dialog may not be displayed if the
interval is very short). Note that you cannot
adjust settings, play pictures back, or use
the menus while shooting is in progress.
228 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
❚❚ Ending Shooting
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, highlight Off in
the time-lapse movie menu and press J (note that this may not
end shooting if the value selected for Interval is very short, in
which case shooting can be ended by turning the camera off ). A
movie will be created from the frames shot to that point. Note
that if the power source is removed or disconnected or the
memory card is ejected, shooting end (but no beep will sound)
and no movie will be recorded.
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera focuses before each shot. If the currently-selected
focus mode is AF-S and Off is selected for Interval priority, the
camera will skip to the next interval when unable to focus.
D Calculating the Length of the Final Movie
The total number of frames in the final movie can be calculated by
dividing the shooting time by the interval, rounding up, and adding 1.
The length of the final movie can then be calculated by dividing the
number of shots by the frame rate selected for Frame size/frame rate.
A 48-frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080; 24p, for example, will be
about two seconds long. The maximum length for time-lapse movies
is 20 minutes.
Frame size/frame rate
Memory card indicator
Length recorded/
maximum length
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 229
D Time-Lapse Movies
Time-lapse cannot be combined with some camera features, including
movie recording, long time-exposures (bulb or time photography), the
self-timer, bracketing, HDR (high dynamic range), multiple exposure,
interval timer photography, and focus shift. Active D-Lighting is
disabled automatically. Note that because shutter speed and the time
needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to
shot, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the
next shot may vary. Changes to settings will not be applied and
shooting will not begin if a time-lapse movie cannot be recorded at
current settings (for example, if the memory card is full, the interval or
shooting time is zero, or the interval is longer than the shooting time).
Shooting may end if camera controls are used or settings are changed
or HDMI cable is connected. A movie will be created from the frames
shot to the point where shooting ended.
D Image Review
The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in
progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a few seconds
after each shot if On or On (monitor only) is selected for Image
review in the playback menu (the frame may not be displayed if the
interval is very short). Other playback operations cannot be performed
while the frame is displayed.
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features,
including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2
• Flash photography
• Exposure delay mode
• Long exposure noise reduction
• Flicker reduction
230 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Focus Shift Shooting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Focus shift, which automatically varies focus over a series of
shots, is used to take photos that will later be combined using
focus stacking to create a single image with increased depth of
field. Before using focus shift, choose a focus mode of AF-S or AF-C
and a release mode other than Self-timer (E).
Selecting Focus shift shooting displays the options below.
• Start: Start shooting. The camera will change the focus distance
by the selected amount with each shot.
• No. of shots: Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).
• Focus step width: Choose the amount the focus distance changes
with each shot.
• Interval until next shot: The time between shots, in seconds. Select
00 to take photos at up to about 5.5 fps.
• First-frame exposure lock: If On is selected, the camera will lock
exposure for all images at the setting for the first frame.
• Peaking stack image: If Create is selected, the camera will employ
focus peaking to create a black-and-white preview stack that
can be used to check focus after shooting.
• Silent photography: Select On to silence the shutter during
shooting.
• Starting storage folder: Highlight options and press 2 to select or
deselect. Choose New folder to create a new folder for each
new sequence, Reset file numbering to reset file numbering
to 0001 when a new folder is created.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 231
Focus Shift Photography
D Before Shooting
Before beginning focus shift photography, take a test shot at current
settings and view the results. We recommend using a tripod and
selecting Off for Vibration reduction in the photo shooting menu. To
ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is
fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an AC
adapter and power connector (available separately).
1 Select Focus shift shooting.
Highlight Focus shift shooting in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
Focus shift options will be displayed.
2 Adjust focus shift settings.
Adjust the following settings:
• No. of shots: Choose the number of shots.
Highlight No. of shots and
press 2.
232 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Choose the number of shots
and press J.
• Focus step width: Choose the amount the focus distance
changes with each shot.
Highlight Focus step width and
press 2.
Press 4 to reduce the focus step
width, 2 to increase. Press J to
proceed.
Because depth of field is reduced at short focus distances,
we recommend choosing smaller focus steps and
increasing the number of shots when photographing
subjects close to the camera.
• Interval until next shot: Choose the interval between shots.
Highlight Interval until next
shot and press 2.
Choose the interval (in seconds)
and press J.
To ensure the correct exposure when using a flash, choose
an interval long enough for the flash to charge.
• First-frame exposure lock: Enable or disable exposure lock.
Highlight First-frame
exposure lock and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 233
• Peaking stack image: Enable or disable Peaking stack image.
Highlight Peaking stack image
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Silent photography: Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight Silent photography
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• Starting storage folder: Choose starting folder options.
Highlight Starting storage
folder and press 2.
234 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Highlight options and press 2
to select or deselect. Press J to
proceed.
3 Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J.
Shooting starts after about 3 s. The
display turns off and the camera takes
photographs at the selected interval,
starting at the focus distance selected
at the start of shooting and progressing out toward infinity
by the selected focus step distance with each shot. Shooting
ends when the selected number of shots has been taken or
focus reaches infinity. To end shooting before all shots have
been taken, press the shutter-release button halfway or press
the J button between shots.
D Aperture
To prevent the loss of definition that can occur at smaller apertures,
choose an aperture with an f-number lower than f/11–f/8.
D During Shooting
During focus shift photography, the release mode indicator in the
control panel will turn off and the memory card access lamp will flash.
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Power off
delay) > Standby timer, the standby timer will not expire during
shooting. Note that changing camera settings while focus shift
photography is in progress may cause shooting to end. Shooting will
end if focus is adjusted during shooting.
D Peaking Stack Image
During playback, a p icon appears on photographs shot with Create
selected for Peaking stack image, indicating that a focus stack
preview can be displayed by pressing the i button and selecting
Display peaking stack image. The areas displayed in white will be in
focus when the pictures are stacked. Focus stack previews can only be
viewed on the camera used to create them.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 235
D Focus Shift Photography
If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed
for the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at
less than the power needed for full exposure. Focus shift cannot be
combined with some camera features, including movie recording,
time-lapse movies, bracketing, the self-timer, long time-exposures
(bulb or time photography), HDR (high dynamic range), multiple
exposure, and interval timer photography. Note that because the
shutter speed and time needed to record images may vary from one
shot to the next, the time between the end of one interval and the
beginning of the next may vary. If shooting cannot proceed at current
settings (for example, if shutter speed is set to Bulb or Time), a warning
will be displayed.
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features,
including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2
• Flash photography
• Exposure delay mode
• Flicker reduction
236 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Silent Photography
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On to reduce vibrations caused by the shutter when
shooting landscapes and other static subjects (0 67). Use of a
tripod is recommended. Pictures are taken using the electronic
shutter, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5
(Shutter type). Regardless of the option selected for Beep
options in the setup menu, the beep speaker is disabled, as are
the flash and long-exposure noise reduction. In continuous
release modes, the frame advance rate will change (0 85).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 237
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting
Options
To view the movie shooting menu,
select the 1 tab in the camera menus.
Option
Reset movie shooting menu
File naming
Choose image area
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
0
239
239
239
239
239
239
240
240
241
241
241
241
242
242
Option
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Vibration reduction
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
Headphone volume
Timecode
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Movie Shooting Menu Defaults” (0 146).
238 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
0
242
242
243
243
243
243
243
244
244
245
245
245
246
Reset Movie Shooting Menu
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Select Yes to restore movie shooting menu options to their
default values (0 146).
File Naming
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in
which movies are stored. The default prefix is “DSC” (0 165).
Choose Image Area
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose a movie crop (image area) from FX or DX.
Frame Size/Frame Rate
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more
information, see “Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality”
(0 116).
Movie Quality
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose from High quality and Normal.
Movie File Type
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Record movies in MOV or MP4 format.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 239
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Adjust the following ISO sensitivity
settings.
• Maximum sensitivity: Choose the upper
limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
from values between ISO 200 and Hi 2.
Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in
modes P, S, and A and when On is selected for Auto ISO control
(mode M) in mode M.
• Auto ISO control (mode M): Select On to enable auto ISO sensitivity
control in mode M, Off to use the value selected for ISO
sensitivity (mode M).
• ISO sensitivity (mode M): Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M
from values between ISO 64 (Z 7) or 100 (Z 6) and Hi 2. Auto ISO
sensitivity control is used in other modes.
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing and
noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase. This
can be prevented by choosing a lower value for ISO sensitivity
settings > Maximum sensitivity.
White Balance
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the white balance for movies
(0 63). Select Same as photo settings
to use the option currently selected for
photos.
240 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Set Picture Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose a Picture Control for movies
(0 94). Select Same as photo settings
to use the option currently selected for
photos.
Manage Picture Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Create custom Picture Controls (0 179).
Active D-Lighting
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Preserve details in highlights and
shadows, creating movies with natural
contrast. Select Same as photo settings
to use the option currently selected for
photos (0 110, 120).
High ISO NR
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies
recorded at high ISO sensitivities (0 183).
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 241
Vignette Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce vignetting in movies (0 184). Select Same as photo
settings to use the option currently selected for photos.
Diffraction Compensation
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce diffraction in movies (0 184).
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce barrel and pin-cushion distortion in movies (0 184).
Flicker Reduction
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting movies under
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting. Choose Auto to allow the
camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or
manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power
supply.
D “Flicker Reduction” in the Movie Shooting Menu
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction
may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in
which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher fnumber). To prevent flicker, select mode M and choose a shutter speed
adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s
for 60 Hz; 1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.
242 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Metering
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose how the camera meters exposure in movie mode
(0 108). Spot metering is not available.
Focus Mode
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose a focus mode for movie recording (0 52).
AF-Area Mode
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose how the camera focuses in movie mode (0 54).
Vibration Reduction
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose a vibration reduction option for movie recording
(0 112). Select Same as photo settings to use the option
currently selected for photos.
Electronic VR
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in
movie mode.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 243
Microphone Sensitivity
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Turn built-in or external microphones on
or off or adjust microphone sensitivity.
Choose Auto to adjust sensitivity
automatically or Microphone off to turn
sound recording off; to select
microphone sensitivity manually, select
Manual and choose a sensitivity.
D The 2 Icon
Movies that were recorded without sound
are indicated by a 2 icon in movie and fullframe playback.
Attenuator
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Select Enable to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio
distortion when recording movies in loud environments.
244 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Frequency Response
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
If S Wide range is selected, built-in and external
microphones will respond to a wide range of frequencies, from
music to the bustling hum of a city street. Choose T Vocal
range to bring out human voices.
Wind Noise Reduction
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the built-in microphone
(optional stereo microphones are unaffected), reducing noise
produced by wind blowing over the microphone (note that
other sounds may also be affected). Wind-noise reduction for
optional stereo microphones that support this feature can be
enabled or disabled using microphone controls.
Headphone Volume
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Press 1 or 3 to adjust headphone volume.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 245
Timecode
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose whether to record time codes giving the hour, minute,
second, and frame number for each frame when shooting
movies. Time codes are available only with movies recorded in
MOV format. Before proceeding, select Time zone and date in
the setup menu and confirm that the clock is set correctly.
Option
Description
• On: Time codes are recorded and appear in the display.
• On (with HDMI output): Time codes will be included with
Record
footage saved to Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMOtimecodes
series Monitor recorders connected via an HDMI cable.
• Off: Time codes are not recorded.
• Record run: Time codes are incremented only while
Count-up
recording is in progress.
method • Free run: Time codes are incremented continuously,
including while the camera is off.
• Reset: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00.
• Enter manually: Enter the hour, minute, second, and frame
Timecode
number manually.
origin
• Current time: Set the time code to the current time as
provided by the camera clock.
Select On to compensate for discrepancies between the
Drop frame frame count and the actual recording time at frame rates of
30 and 60 fps.
D HDMI Devices
Selecting On (with HDMI output) for Record timecodes may disrupt
footage output to HDMI devices.
246 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To view Custom Settings, select the
A tab in the camera menus.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 247
The following Custom Settings are available:
a
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
a9
a10
a11
a12
a13
b
b1
b2
b3
b4
c
c1
c2
c3
Custom Setting 1
Reset custom settings
Autofocus
AF-C priority selection
AF-S priority selection
Focus tracking with lock-on
Auto-area AF face/eye detection
Focus points used
Store points by orientation
AF activation
Limit AF-area mode selection
Focus point wrap-around
Focus point options
Low-light AF
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
Manual focus ring in AF mode 2
Metering/exposure
EV steps for exposure cntrl
Easy exposure compensation
Center-weighted area
Fine-tune optimal exposure
Timers/AE lock
Shutter-release button AE-L
Self-timer
Power off delay
248 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
0
250
251
251
252
252
253
253
254
254
255
255
255
256
256
257
257
258
258
259
259
260
Custom Setting 1
d
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
d7
d8
d9
d10
d11
e
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
e7
f
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
f7
Shooting/display
CL mode shooting speed
Max. continuous release
Sync. release mode options
Exposure delay mode
Shutter type
Limit selectable image area
File number sequence
Apply settings to live view
Framing grid display
Peaking highlights
View all in continuous mode
Bracketing/flash
Flash sync speed
Flash shutter speed
Exposure comp. for flash
Auto c ISO sensitivity control
Modeling flash
Auto bracketing (mode M)
Bracketing order
Controls
Customize i menu
Custom control assignment
OK button
Shutter spd & aperture lock
Customize command dials
Release button to use dial
Reverse indicators
0
261
261
261
261
262
262
263
264
264
264
264
265
266
266
266
267
267
268
269
271
279
281
281
283
283
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 249
0
Custom Setting 1
g Movie
g1 Customize i menu
g2 Custom control assignment
g3 OK button
g4 AF speed
g5 AF tracking sensitivity
g6 Highlight display
1 Items modified from default values are indicated by asterisks (“U“).
2 Available with compatible lenses only.
284
285
290
290
291
292
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Custom Settings Menu Defaults” (0 148).
Reset Custom Settings
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values
(0 148).
250 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses
in focus mode AF-C.
Option
G Release
F Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus
(focus priority).
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is
selected for focus mode. The camera will continue to adjust
focus until the shutter is released.
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses
in focus mode AF-S.
Option
G Release
F Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus
(focus priority).
Regardless of the option selected, if focus point is displayed in
green when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, focus will lock
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus lock
continues until the shutter is released.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 251
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how quickly focus responds
when something passes between the
subject and the camera in focus mode
AF-C. Choose from values between
5 (Delayed) and 1 (Quick). The higher
the value, the slower the response and
the less likely you are to lose focus on your original subject. The
lower the value, the quicker the response and the easier it is to
shift focus to objects crossing your field of view. Note that 2 and
1 (Quick) are equivalent to 3 when auto-area AF is selected for
AF-area mode.
a4: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces or on
faces and eyes when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Option
Description
When the camera detects a portrait subject, it
Face and eye
automatically focuses on one or the other of the
detection on
subject’s eyes, or on the subject’s face if the eyes are
not detected.
When the camera detects a portrait subject, it
Face detection on
automatically focuses on the subject’s face.
Off
Face and eye detection disabled.
252 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a5: Focus Points Used
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection.
Option
R
I
Description
Every focus point available in the current AF-area
All points
mode can be selected.
The number of available focus points is reduced by
Every other three quarters (the number of focus points available in
point
Wide-area AF (L) mode does not change). Use for
quick focus-point selection.
a6: Store Points by Orientation
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for
“wide” (landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation
with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation
with the camera rotated 90° counterclockwise.
Select No to use the same focus point regardless of camera orientation.
Camera rotated
90°counter-clockwise
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated
90°clockwise
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 253
Select Yes to enable separate focus-point selection.
Camera rotated
90°counter-clockwise
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated
90°clockwise
a7: AF Activation
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus
(Shutter/AF-ON) or if focus can only be adjusted using the AF-ON
button or other controls to which AF-ON has been assigned
(AF-ON only).
a8: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options that can be selected
by rotating the sub-command dial when
AF-area mode is assigned to the i menu
or a camera control. Highlight the
desired modes and press 2 to select or
deselect. Press J to save changes when
settings are complete.
254 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the display to another. If Wrap is selected, focus-point
selection will “wrap around” from top to bottom, bottom to top,
right to left, and left to right, so that, for example, pressing the
sub-selector right when a focus point at the right edge of the
display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at
the left edge of the display.
a10: Focus Point Options
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose from the following focus point display options:
• Manual focus mode: Choose On to display the active focus point in
manual focus mode, Off to display the focus point only during
focus point selection.
• Dynamic-area AF assist: If On is selected, both the selected focus
point and the surrounding focus points will be displayed in
dynamic-area AF mode. Choose Off to display only the
selected focus point.
a11: Low-Light AF
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On for more accurate focus under low-light conditions
when AF-S is selected for focus mode, but note that camera may
require more time to focus. This option takes effect only in photo
mode when a setting other than b is chosen with the mode dial.
While low-light AF is in effect, “Low-light” will appear in the
display and the display refresh rate may drop.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 255
a12: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist
the focus operation in photo mode when lighting is poor.
Option
On
Off
Description
The illuminator lights as required (AF-S focus mode only).
The illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation.
The camera may not be able to focus when lighting is poor.
D The AF-Assist Illuminator
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1–3 m (3 ft 4 in.–
9 ft 10 in.); when using the illuminator, remove the lens hood. Do not
obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
a13: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual
focus in autofocus mode. Choose from the options below.
• Enable: Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus
ring while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway
(autofocus with manual override). To refocus using autofocus,
lift your finger from the shutter-release button and then press
it halfway again.
• Disable: The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus
while autofocus mode is selected.
256 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed,
aperture, ISO sensitivity, bracketing, and exposure and flash
compensation.
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the E button is needed for exposure
compensation.
• On (auto reset): In modes P, S, and A, exposure compensation can
be set by rotating the command dial not currently used for
shutter speed or aperture (easy exposure compensation is not
available in mode M). The setting selected using the command
dial is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer
expires (exposure compensation settings selected using the
E button are not reset).
• On: As above, except that the exposure compensation value
selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera
turns off or the standby timer expires.
• Off: Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button
and rotating the main command dial.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 257
b3: Center-Weighted Area
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the size of the area given the most weight in centerweighted metering.
b4: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure
value selected by the camera. Exposure
can be fine-tuned separately for each
metering method by from +1 to −1 EV in
steps of 1/6 EV.
D Fine-Tuning Exposure
The exposure compensation (E) icon is not displayed when exposure
fine-tuning is in effect. The only way to determine how much exposure
has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu.
258 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Option
O
P
Description
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks
On (half press)
exposure.
Exposure only locks while the shutter-release
On (burst mode)
button is pressed all the way down.
Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock
Off
exposure.
c2: Self-Timer
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of
shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
• Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
• Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
• Interval between shots: Choose the interval between shots when
Number of shots is more than 1.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 259
c3: Power Off Delay
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how long the control panel and camera displays remain
on when no operations are performed. Different settings can be
chosen for Playback, Menus, Image review, and Standby
timer, the last of which determines how long both the monitor
or viewfinder display and the control panel remain on when no
operations are performed during shooting (the monitor and
viewfinder dim a few seconds before the standby timer expires).
Choose shorter power-off delays for longer battery life.
260 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d: Shooting/Display
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous
release mode.
d2: Max. Continuous Release
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst
in continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1
and 200. Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no
limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst
when a shutter speed of 1 s or slower is selected in mode S or M.
D The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d2, shooting will
slow when the memory buffer fills (r00).
d3: Sync. Release Mode Options
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the shutters on the remote cameras are
synchronized with the shutter on the master camera when using
an optional wireless remote controller.
d4: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur
pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to
3 seconds after the shutter-release button is pressed.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 261
d5: Shutter Type
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the type of shutter used for photographs.
Option
O
P
x
Description
The camera chooses the shutter type
automatically according to shutter speed. The
Auto
electronic front-curtain shutter is used to reduce
blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
Mechanical
The camera uses the mechanical shutter for all
shutter
photos.
Electronic front- The camera uses the electronic front-curtain
curtain shutter shutter for all photos.
D “Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter”
The fastest shutter speed available when Electronic front-curtain
shutter is selected is 1/2000 s.
d6: Limit Selectable Image Area
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options available when
image-area selection is assigned to the i
menu or to the command dials and a
camera control. Highlight the desired
options and press 2 to select or
deselect. Press J to save changes when
settings are complete.
262 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d7: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
When a picture is taken, the camera names the file by adding
one to the last file number used. This option controls whether
file numbering continues from the last number used when a
new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
On
Off
Reset
Description
File numbering continues from the last number used. This
simplifies file management by minimizing the occurrence
of duplicate file names.
File numbering restarts from 0001 or from the largest file
number in the current folder (if you turn sequential file
numbering off and then on again, file numbering will
resume from the last number used).
As for On, except that the next picture taken after Reset is
selected is assigned a file number by adding one to the
largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is
empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.
D File Number Sequence
If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and file
numbering will restart from 0001. The new folder is assigned a number
one higher than current folder number or, if a folder with that number
already exists, the lowest available folder number. If the current folder
is numbered 999, the camera will not be able to create a new folder
and the shutter release will be disabled (in addition, movie recording
may be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files
needed to record a movie of the maximum length would result in the
folder containing over 5000 files or a file with a number over 9999). To
resume shooting, choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 (File number
sequence) and then either format the current memory card or insert a
new memory card.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 263
d8: Apply Settings to Live View
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On to preview how changes to such settings as white
balance, Picture Controls, and exposure compensation affect
color and brightness in photo mode, or select Off to adjust
brightness and hue for ease of viewing (regardless of the option
selected, the effects of the aforementioned settings are always
visible in movie mode). A g icon is displayed when Off is
selected.
d9: Framing Grid Display
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On to display a grid for reference when framing shots.
d10: Peaking Highlights
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects
that are in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display.
Choose the peaking level and outline color.
• Peaking level: Choose from 3 (high sensitivity), 2 (standard),
1 (low sensitivity), and Off; the higher the value, the greater
the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
• Peaking highlight color: Choose the highlight color.
d11: View All in Continuous Mode
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
If Off is selected, the display will go blank during burst
photography.
264 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the flash sync speed.
• 1/200 s (Auto FP): Auto FP high-speed sync is enabled with
compatible flash units and the maximum sync speed for other
flash units is set to 1/200 s. When the camera shows a shutter
speed of 1/200 s in mode P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be
activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/200 s, and
shutter speeds as fast as 1/8000 s can be selected by the camera
(modes P and A) or by the user (modes S and M).
• 1/200 s–1/60 s: Set the maximum flash sync speed to the selected
value.
D Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in mode S or M, choose a
speed one setting slower than the slowest speed possible (30 s or
Time). A flash sync indicator (“X”) will appear in the display and control
panel together with the flash sync speed.
D Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest
shutter speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose
the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even in bright
sunlight. The flash information display shows “FP” when 1/200 s (Auto
FP) is selected.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 265
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the slowest shutter speed available when front- or rearcurtain sync or red-eye reduction is used in mode P or A
(regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow
as 30 s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow
rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync).
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure
compensation is used.
Option
YE
E
Description
Both flash level and exposure compensation are
Entire frame
adjusted to modify exposure over the entire
frame.
Exposure compensation applies to background
Background only
only.
e4: Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when auto ISO
sensitivity control is enabled.
e
f
Option
Description
The camera takes both the main subject and
Subject and
background lighting into account when adjusting ISO
background
sensitivity.
ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main
Subject only
subject is correctly exposed.
266 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
e5: Modeling Flash
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
If On is selected when the camera is used with an optional flash
unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting system, pressing
the button to which Preview has been assigned using Custom
Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) emits a modeling flash
that can be used to preview the effects of flash lighting. No
modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected.
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose which settings are affected when AE & flash bracketing
or AE bracketing is selected for Auto bracketing > Auto
bracketing set in the photo shooting menu and the mode dial
is rotated to M.
Option
F
G
H
I
Description
The camera varies shutter speed (AE bracketing)
Flash/speed
or shutter speed and flash level (AE & flash
bracketing).
The camera varies shutter speed and aperture (AE
Flash/speed/
bracketing) or shutter speed, aperture, and flash
aperture
level (AE & flash bracketing).
The camera varies aperture (AE bracketing) or
Flash/aperture
aperture and flash level (AE & flash bracketing).
The camera varies flash level only (AE & flash
Flash only
bracketing).
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or qA (auto
aperture) flash control. If auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled
when a setting other than Flash only is selected, ISO sensitivity
will be fixed at the value for the first shot unless the flash is used.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 267
e7: Bracketing Order
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
At the default setting of MTR > under > over (H), exposure,
flash, and white balance bracketing are performed in the
following order: the unmodified shot is taken first, followed by
the shot with the lowest value, followed by the shot with the
highest value. If Under > MTR > over (I) is selected, shooting
will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value. This
setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
268 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f: Controls
f1: Customize i Menu
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options displayed in the i menu for photo mode.
The following options can be assigned to any position in the
menu by highlighting the desired position, pressing J, and
choosing the desired option.
J
8
o
E
Option
Choose image area
0
165
Image quality
104
Image size
106
Exposure compensation
Set Picture Control
82
80,
169
63,
98
94
Color space
182
Active D-Lighting
110
Long exposure NR
183
High ISO NR
183
Metering
108
107,
354
189
52,
113
54,
113
112
9 ISO sensitivity settings
m White balance
h
p
y
q
r
w
c
Flash mode
Y Flash compensation
s Focus mode
t AF-area mode
u Vibration reduction
Option
t Auto bracketing
$ Multiple exposure
2
HDR (high dynamic
range)
Silent photography
L
v Release mode
w Custom control
assignment
z Exposure delay mode
O Shutter type
y
0
190
200
207
67
84
271
261
262
Apply settings to live
264
view
Split-screen display zoom 270
z
W Peaking highlights
3 Monitor/viewfinder
brightness
Z Bluetooth connection
U Wi-Fi connection
264
295,
297
308
109
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 269
A Split-Screen Display Zoom
When assigned to the i menu, Split-screen
display zoom can be used to split the
display into two boxes showing separate
areas of the frame side-by-side at a high
zoom ratio. The positions of the magnified
areas are shown in the navigation window,
making it easier to check focus at two
different locations when photographing a
building or other wide object situated at
right angles to the camera.
Navigation window
Use the X and W (Q) buttons to zoom in
and out, or use the J button to select a box
and press 4 or 2 to scroll the selected area
left or right. Pressing 1 or 3 scrolls both
areas up or down simultaneously. To focus
on the subject at the center of the selected
area, press the shutter-release button
halfway. To exit the split-screen display,
press the i button.
270 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Area in focus
f2: Custom Control Assignment
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
To choose the functions assigned to the following controls in
photo mode, whether used individually or in combination with
the command dials, highlight the desired option and press J.
w Fn1 button
V AF-ON button
8 Center of subselector
y Fn2 button
7 Sub-selector
z Movie-record
button
S Lens Fn button
l Lens control ring
The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option
K
A
F
E
D
C
B
r
h
q
w y V 7 8 z S l
Select center focus point
— — ✔ — ✔ — —
—
AF-ON
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ — ✔
—
AF lock only
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ — ✔
—
AE lock (Hold)
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔ ✔
—
AE lock (Reset on release)
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔ ✔
—
AE lock only
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ — ✔
—
AE/AF lock
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ — ✔
—
FV lock
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — ✔
—
cDisable/enable
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — ✔
—
Preview
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔ ✔
—
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 271
Option
L
M
N
t
1
c
4
b
p
O
3
K
g
J
8
m
h
y
w
I/Y
z
w y V 7 8 z S l
Matrix metering
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — ✔
—
Center-weighted metering
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — ✔
—
Spot metering
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — ✔
—
Highlight-weighted metering
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — ✔
—
Bracketing burst
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — ✔
—
Sync. release selection
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — ✔
—
+ NEF (RAW)
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔ ✔
—
Framing grid display
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔ ✔
—
Zoom on/off
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
—
MY MENU
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ ✔
—
Access top item in MY MENU
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ ✔
—
Playback
✔ ✔ — — — — ✔
—
Protect
✔ ✔ — — — — —
—
Choose image area
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔ —
—
Image quality/size
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
White balance
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Set Picture Control
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Active D-Lighting
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Metering
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Flash mode/compensation
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Focus mode/AF-area mode
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
272 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
t
$
2
z
$
W
c
w
Y
x
X
q
E
w y V 7 8 z S l
Auto bracketing
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Multiple exposure
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
HDR (high dynamic range)
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Exposure delay mode
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Shutter spd & aperture lock
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
—
Peaking highlights
✔ ✔ — — — — —
—
Rating
✔ ✔ — — — — —
—
Choose non-CPU lens number
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔ —
—
Same as multi selector
— — — ✔ — — —
—
Focus point selection
— — — ✔ — — —
—
Focus (M/A)
— — — — — — — ✔ 1, 2
Aperture
— — — — — — — ✔2
Exposure compensation
— — — — — — — ✔2
None
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔ ✔
✔2
1 Available only with compatible lenses.
2 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control ring can only be used to
adjust focus.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 273
The following options are available:
Option
Description
K Select center Pressing the control selects the center focus point.
focus point
A AF-ON
F AF lock only
E
D
C
B
r
h
q
L
M
Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and
AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the control is pressed a
second time or the standby timer expires.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and
AE lock (Reset remains locked until the control is pressed a
on release)
second time, the shutter is released, or the
standby timer expires.
AE lock only Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while the control is
AE/AF lock
pressed.
Press the control to lock flash value for optional
FV lock
flash units. Press again to cancel FV lock.
If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will
cDisable/
be selected while the control is pressed. If the flash
enable
is currently enabled, it will instead be disabled
while the control is pressed.
Keep the control pressed to preview color,
Preview
exposure, and depth of field.
Matrix
Matrix metering is activated while the control is
metering
pressed.
Centerweighted
metering
Center-weighted metering is activated while the
control is pressed.
274 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
N
t
1
c
Description
Spot metering is activated while the control is
Spot metering
pressed.
HighlightHighlight-weighted metering is activated while
weighted
the control is pressed.
metering
If the control is pressed while exposure, flash, or
ADL bracketing is active in single frame release
mode, all shots in the current bracketing program
Bracketing
will be taken each time the shutter-release button
burst
is pressed. If white balance bracketing is active or a
continuous release mode is selected, the camera
will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutterrelease button is held down.
When an optional wireless remote controller is
connected, the control can be used to toggle
between remote release and master or
synchronized release. The options available
depend on the setting chosen for Custom Setting
d3 (Sync. release mode options):
• If Sync is selected, you can choose from Master
release only (keep the control pressed to take
Sync. release
pictures with the master camera only) and
selection
Remote release only (keep the control pressed
to take pictures with the remote cameras only).
• If No sync is selected, you can choose from
Synchronized release (keep the control pressed
to synchronize the releases on the master and
remote cameras) and Remote release only
(keep the control pressed to take pictures with
the remote cameras only).
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 275
Option
4 + NEF (RAW)
b Framing grid
display
p
Zoom on/off
O MY MENU
3 Access top
item in
MY MENU
Description
If a JPEG option is currently selected for image
quality, “RAW” will be displayed and an NEF (RAW)
copy will be recorded with the next picture taken
after the control is pressed (the original image
quality setting will be restored when you remove
your finger from the shutter-release button). NEF
(RAW) copies are recorded at the settings currently
selected for NEF (RAW) recording and Image size
> NEF (RAW) in the photo shooting menu. To exit
without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the
control again.
Press the control to turn the framing grid display
on or off.
Press the control to zoom the display in on the
area around the current focus point. Press the
control again to zoom out.
Pressing the control displays “MY MENU”.
Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a
frequently-used menu item.
K Playback
g
J
8
Press the control to start playback.
Press the control during playback to protect the
Protect
current picture.
Choose image Press the control and rotate a command dial to
area
choose the image area.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Image
dial to choose an image quality option and the
quality/size
sub-command dial to select image size.
276 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
m
h
y
w
I/Y
z
t
$
2
Description
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a white balance option (in some
White balance
cases, a sub-option can be selected using the subcommand dial).
Set Picture
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
Control
choose a Picture Control.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
adjust Active D-Lighting.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
Metering
choose a metering option.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Flash mode/
dial to choose a flash mode and the sub-command
compensation
dial to adjust flash output.
Press the control and rotate the main and subFocus mode/
command dials to choose the focus and AF-area
AF-area mode
modes.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Auto
dial to choose the number of shots and the subbracketing
command dial to select the bracketing increment
or Active D-Lighting amount.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Multiple
dial to choose the mode and the sub-command
exposure
dial to choose the number of shots.
HDR (high
Press the control and rotate the main command
dynamic
dial to choose the mode and the sub-command
range)
dial to choose the exposure differential.
Active
D-Lighting
z Exposure
delay mode
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose the shutter-release delay.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 277
Option
$
W
c
w
Y
x
X
Description
Press the control and rotate the main command
Shutter spd & dial to lock shutter speed in modes S and M; press
aperture lock the control and rotate the sub-command dial to
lock aperture in modes A and M.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Peaking
dial to choose a peaking level and the subhighlights
command dial to select the peaking color.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Rating
dial to rate the current picture during playback.
Choose non- Press the control and rotate a command dial to
CPU lens
choose a lens number saved using the Non-CPU
number
lens data option in the setup menu.
Pressing the sub-selector up, down, left, and right
during shooting or playback has the same effect as
pressing 1, 3, 4, and 2 on the multi selector. To
Same as multi choose the role played by sub-selector during
selector
zoom, highlight Same as multi selector and press
2. Choose from Scroll (scroll the display) and
Display next/previous frame (view other photos
at the same zoom ratio).
Use the control to select the focus point. Using the
Focus point
control during playback ends playback and
selection
enables focus-point selection.
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the
control ring while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway (autofocus with manual override).
Focus (M/A)
To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from
the shutter-release button and then press it
halfway again.
Aperture
Use the control to adjust aperture.
q
E Exposure
compensation
None
Use the control to adjust exposure compensation.
The control has no effect.
278 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f3: OK Button
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the role assigned to the
J button in photo mode and during
playback.
• Shooting mode: Choose from the options below. Regardless of
the option selected, the J button can be used for focus
tracking when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Option
K Select center
focus point
p
Zoom on/off
None
Description
Pressing J selects the center focus point.
Press J to zoom the display in on the area
around the current focus point (to choose the
zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press 2).
Press J again to return to the previous display.
Pressing J during shooting has no effect.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 279
• Playback mode: Choose from the options below. Regardless of
the option selected, pressing J when a movie is displayed full
frame starts movie playback.
Option
Description
n Thumbnail on/ Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail
off
o View
histograms
p Zoom on/off
u Choose folder
playback.
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,
a histogram is displayed while the J button is
pressed.
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail
playback and playback zoom (to choose the
zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press 2).
The zoom display is centered on the active focus
point.
A folder-selection dialog will be displayed;
highlight a folder and press J to view the
pictures in the selected folder.
280 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f4: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Selecting On for Shutter speed lock locks shutter speed at the
value currently selected in mode S or M. Selecting On for
Aperture lock locks aperture at the value currently selected in
mode A or M. While shutter speed or aperture lock is in effect, a O
icon will be displayed. Shutter speed and aperture lock are not
available in mode P.
f5: Customize Command Dials
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Customize the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
• Reverse rotation: Reverse the direction of
rotation of the command dials for
selected operations. Highlight options
and press 2 to select or deselect, and
then press J to save changes and exit.
• Change main/sub: Choose the roles played by the command dials
for exposure and focus operations.
- Exposure setting: If On is selected, the main command dial will
control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If
On (Mode A) is selected, the main command dial will be used
to set aperture in mode A only.
- Autofocus setting: This option applies to the control assigned
Focus mode/AF-area mode using Custom Setting f2
(Custom control assignment). If On is selected, the focus
mode can be chosen by keeping the control pressed and
rotating the sub-command dial, AF-area mode by keeping
the control pressed and rotating the main command dial.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 281
• Menus and playback: Select Off to use the multi selector for menus
and playback. If On or On (image review excluded) is
selected, the main command dial can be used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback and to highlight
thumbnails and menu items. The sub-command dial is used in
full-frame playback to skip forward or back according to the
option selected for Sub-dial frame advance and in thumbnail
playback to page up or down. While menus are displayed,
rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu
for the highlighted option, while rotating it left displays the
previous menu. To make a selection, press 2 or J. Select On
(image review excluded) to prevent the command dials from
being used for playback during image review.
• Sub-dial frame advance: When On or On (image review
excluded) is selected for Menus and playback, the subcommand dial can be rotated during full-frame playback to
select a folder, to skip forward or back 10 or 50 frames at a time,
or to skip to the next or previous protected picture, the next or
previous photo, the next or previous movie, or the next or
previous picture with a selected rating (to choose the rating,
highlight Rating and press 2).
282 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f6: Release Button to Use Dial
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by
holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by
rotating the command dial after the button is released. This ends
when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires. This setting
applies to the E, S, and c (E) buttons and also to controls to
which the following roles have been assigned using Custom
Settings f2 or g2 (Custom control assignment): Choose image
area, Image quality/size, White balance, Set Picture Control,
Active D-Lighting, Metering, Flash mode/compensation,
Focus mode/AF-area mode, Auto bracketing, Multiple
exposure, HDR (high dynamic range), Exposure delay mode,
Shutter spd & aperture lock, Peaking highlights, Choose
non-CPU lens number, and Microphone sensitivity.
f7: Reverse Indicators
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
If
(W) is selected, the exposure indicator is
displayed with negative values on the left and positive values
on the right. Select
(V) to display positive
values on the left and negative values on the right.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 283
g: Movie
g1: Customize i Menu
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options displayed in the i menu for movie mode.
The following options can be assigned to any position in the
menu by highlighting the desired position, pressing J, and
choosing the desired option.
Option
J Choose image area
G Frame size and rate/
Image quality
E Exposure compensation
9 ISO sensitivity settings
m White balance
h Set Picture Control
y Active D-Lighting
w Metering
s Focus mode
t AF-area mode
u Vibration reduction
4 Electronic VR
0
119
116
82
240
63,
98
94
110,
120
108,
120
52,
121
54,
121
112
120
284 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
H
5
6
7
8
W
9
3
Option
Microphone sensitivity
0
118
Attenuator
244
Frequency response
245
Wind noise reduction
245
Headphone volume
245
Peaking highlights
264
Highlight display
292
Monitor/viewfinder
brightness
295,
297
Z Bluetooth connection
U Wi-Fi connection
308
109
g2: Custom Control Assignment
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
To choose the functions assigned to the following controls in
movie mode, whether used individually or in combination with
the command dials, highlight the desired option and press J.
w Fn1 button
V AF-ON button
G Shutter-release
button
y Fn2 button
8 Center of subselector
l Lens control ring
The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option
t
q
i
h
b
g
K
A
F
E
C
B
w y V 8 G l
Power aperture (open)
✔ — — — —
—
Power aperture (close)
— ✔ — — —
—
Exposure compensation +
✔ — — — —
—
Exposure compensation –
— ✔ — — —
—
Framing grid display
✔ ✔ — ✔ —
—
Protect
✔ ✔ — — —
—
Select center focus point
— — ✔ ✔ —
—
AF-ON
— — ✔ — —
—
AF lock only
— — ✔ ✔ —
—
AE lock (Hold)
— — ✔ ✔ —
—
AE lock only
— — ✔ ✔ —
—
AE/AF lock
— — ✔ ✔ —
—
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 285
Option
p Zoom on/off
C Take photos
1 Record movies
J Choose image area
m White balance
h Set Picture Control
y Active D-Lighting
w Metering
z Focus mode/AF-area mode
H Microphone sensitivity
W Peaking highlights
c Rating
X Focus (M/A)
q Power aperture
E Exposure compensation
None
w y V 8 G l
— — ✔ — —
—
— — — — ✔
—
— — ✔ ✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔ — ✔ —
—
✔ ✔ — — —
—
✔ ✔ — — —
—
✔ ✔ — — —
—
✔ ✔ — — —
—
✔ ✔ — — —
—
✔ ✔ — — —
—
✔ ✔ — — —
—
✔ ✔ — — —
—
— — — — — ✔ 1, 2
— — — — — ✔2
— — — — — ✔2
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔2
1 Available only with compatible lenses.
2 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control ring can only be used to
adjust focus.
286 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
The following options are available:
Option
t Power aperture
(open)
q Power aperture
(close)
i
Exposure
compensation +
h
Exposure
compensation –
b Framing grid
display
g Protect
K Select center
focus point
A AF-ON
Description
Aperture widens while the control is pressed.
Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
(Custom control assignment) > Fn2 button >
Power aperture (close) for button-controlled
aperture adjustment.
Aperture narrows while the control is pressed.
Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
(Custom control assignment) > Fn1 button >
Power aperture (open) for button-controlled
aperture adjustment.
Exposure compensation increases while the
control is pressed. Use in combination with
Custom Setting g2 (Custom control
assignment) > Fn2 button > Exposure
compensation − for button-controlled
exposure compensation.
Exposure compensation decreases while the
control is pressed. Use in combination with
Custom Setting g2 (Custom control
assignment) > Fn1 button > Exposure
compensation + for button-controlled
exposure compensation.
Press the control to turn the framing grid display
on or off.
Press the control during playback to protect the
current picture.
Pressing the control selects the center focus
point.
Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 287
F
Option
AF lock only
E AE lock (Hold)
C
AE lock only
B
AE/AF lock
p
Zoom on/off
C Take photos
1
Record movies
J Choose image
area
m White balance
h Set Picture
Control
Description
Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and
remains locked until the control is pressed a
second time or the standby timer expires.
Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Focus and exposure lock while the control is
pressed.
Press the control to zoom the display in on the
area around the current focus point. Press the
control again to zoom out.
Press the shutter-release button all the way
down to take a photograph with an aspect ratio
of 16 : 9.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus
(autofocus mode only) and press it all the way
down to start or end movie recording. The
shutter-release button cannot be used for other
purposes in movie mode. The shutter-release
button on an optional wireless remote controller
or remote cord functions in the same way as the
camera shutter-release button.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose the image area. Note that the image area
cannot be changed while recording is in
progress.
Press the control and rotate the main command
dial to choose a white balance option (in some
cases, a sub-option can be selected using the
sub-command dial).
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
choose a Picture Control.
288 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
y
w
z
H
W
c
X
Option
Active
D-Lighting
Description
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
adjust Active D-Lighting.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
Metering
choose a metering option.
Press the control and rotate the main and subFocus mode/
command dials to choose the focus and AF-area
AF-area mode
modes.
Microphone
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
sensitivity
adjust microphone sensitivity.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Peaking
dial to choose a peaking level and the subhighlights
command dial to select the peaking color.
Press the control and rotate the main command
Rating
dial to rate the current picture during playback.
Use the control to focus manually, independent
of the option selected for focus mode. Press the
Focus (M/A)
shutter-release button halfway or press the AF-ON
button to refocus using autofocus.
Power aperture Use the control to adjust aperture.
q
E Exposure
compensation
Use the control to adjust exposure
compensation.
None
The control has no effect.
D Power Aperture
Power aperture is available only in modes A and M (a 6 icon indicates
that power aperture cannot be used). The display may flicker while
aperture is adjusted.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 289
g3: OK Button
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the role assigned to the
J button in movie mode. Regardless of
the option selected, the J button can be
used for focus tracking when auto-area
AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Option
K Select center
focus point
p Zoom on/off
1 Record movies
None
Description
Pressing J selects the center focus point.
Press J to zoom the display in on the area around
the current focus point (to choose the zoom ratio,
highlight Zoom on/off and press 2).
Press J to start and stop movie recording.
Pressing J has no effect.
g4: AF Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the focus speed for movie mode.
To choose when the selected option
applies, highlight When to apply and
press 2. Choose from Always (the
selected option applies whenever the
camera is in movie mode) and Only
while recording (the selected option applies only while
recording is in progress; at other times, the focus speed is “+5”, or
in other words as fast possible).
290 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
g5: AF Tracking Sensitivity
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how quickly focus responds
when your subject leaves the focus point
or something passes between the
subject and the camera in movie mode.
Choose from values between 7 (Low)
and 1 (High). The higher the value, the
slower the response and the less likely you are to lose focus on
your original subject when something passes between the
subject and the camera. The lower the value, the quicker the
camera is to respond to the subject leaving the focus area by
shifting focus to a new subject in the same area.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 291
g6: Highlight Display
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright
areas of the frame) and select the level of brightness needed to
trigger the highlight display.
• Display pattern: To enable the highlight display, select Pattern 1
or Pattern 2.
Highlights
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
• Highlight display threshold: Choose the brightness needed to
trigger the movie highlight display. The lower the value, the
greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as
highlights. If 255 is selected, the highlight display will show
only areas that are potentially overexposed.
D Highlight Display
If both the highlight display and peaking highlights are enabled, only
peaking highlights will be displayed in manual focus mode. To view
the highlight display, select Off for Custom Setting d10 (Peaking
highlights) > Peaking level.
292 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To view the setup menu, select the B tab
in the camera menus.
Option
Format memory card
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Language
Time zone and date
Monitor brightness
Monitor color balance
Viewfinder brightness
Viewfinder color balance
Control panel brightness
Limit monitor mode selection
Information display
AF fine-tune
Non-CPU lens data
Clean image sensor
Image Dust Off ref photo
Image comment
0
294
294
294
294
295
295
296
297
297
297
298
298
299
300
300
301
303
Option
Copyright information
Beep options
Touch controls
HDMI
Location data
Wireless remote (WR) options
Assign remote (WR) Fn button
Airplane mode
Connect to smart device
Connect to PC
Wireless transmitter (WT-7)
Conformity marking
Battery info
Slot empty release lock
Save/load settings
Reset all settings
Firmware version
0
304
305
305
306
306
307
308
308
308
309
309
309
310
310
311
313
313
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Setup Menu Defaults” (0 152).
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 293
Format Memory Card
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Select Yes to format the memory card.
Note that formatting permanently deletes
all pictures and other data on the card.
Before formatting, be sure to make
backup copies as required.
D During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
Save User Settings
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to
the U1, U2, and U3 positions on the mode dial (0 75).
Reset User Settings
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Reset settings for U1, U2, and U3 to default values (0 76).
Language
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The
languages available vary with the country or region in which the
camera was originally purchased.
294 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Time Zone and Date
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date
display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off. Be sure to
check the camera clock regularly against more accurate
timepieces and adjust time and date settings as necessary.
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically
Time zone
set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
Date format
displayed.
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock
Daylight saving
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.
time
The default setting is Off.
If the clock is reset, a t indicator will be displayed.
Monitor Brightness
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values
for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
Note that monitor brightness can only be adjusted when the
monitor is the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the
“viewfinder only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the
viewfinder.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 295
Monitor Color Balance
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Use the multi selector as shown below to
adjust monitor color balance with
reference to a sample image. The sample
image is the last photograph taken or, in
playback mode, the last photograph
displayed; to choose a different image,
press the W (Q) button and select an
image from a thumbnail list (to view the
highlighted image full frame, press and
hold X). If the memory card contains no
photographs, an empty frame with a
gray border will be displayed in place of
the sample image. Press J to exit when adjustments are
complete.
Increase green
Increase blue
Increase amber
Increase magenta
Note that monitor color balance can only be adjusted when the
monitor is the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the
“viewfinder only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the
viewfinder. Monitor color balance applies only to the shooting,
playback, and menu displays; pictures taken with the camera are
not affected.
296 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Viewfinder Brightness
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust viewfinder brightness. If Auto is selected, viewfinder
brightness will be adjusted automatically in response to lighting
conditions; to adjust brightness manually, select Manual and
press 1 or 3 (choose higher values for increased brightness,
lower values for reduced brightness). Note that viewfinder
brightness can only be adjusted when the viewfinder is the
active display; it cannot be adjusted when the viewfinder is off
or in the “monitor only” monitor mode.
Viewfinder Color Balance
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Use the multi selector to adjust viewfinder color balance as
described in “Monitor Color Balance” (0 296). Note that
viewfinder color balance can only be adjusted when the
viewfinder is the active display; it cannot be adjusted when the
viewfinder is off or in the “monitor only” monitor mode.
Control Panel Brightness
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust the brightness of the control panel. If Auto is selected,
control panel brightness will be adjusted automatically in
response to lighting conditions; to adjust brightness manually,
select Manual and press 1 or 3. Selecting Off turns the control
panel off.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 297
Limit Monitor Mode Selection
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Choose the monitor modes that can be selected using the
monitor mode button. Highlight the desired options and press
2 to select or deselect. Press J to save changes when settings
are complete.
Information Display
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust the color of the lettering in the information display for
ease of viewing. Choose Dark on light (w) to display black letters
on a white background or Light on dark (x) to display white
letters on a dark background.
Dark on light
298 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Light on dark
AF Fine-Tune
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Fine-tune focus for up to 30 lens types. Use only as required. We
recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance
you use frequently; if you perform focus-tuning at a short focus
distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer
distances.
• AF fine-tune (On/Off): Choose On to turn AF tuning on, Off to turn
it off.
• Saved value: Tune AF for the current lens.
Current value
Press 1 to move focal point away from
camera or 3 to move focal point
toward camera; choose from values
between +20 and –20. The camera can
store values for up to 30 lens types.
Only one value can be stored for each
Saved value
type of lens.
• Default: Choose the AF tuning value
used when no previously saved value exists for the current
lens.
• List saved values: List previously saved AF
tuning values. To delete a lens from the
list, highlight the desired lens and press
O. To change a lens identifier (for
example, to choose an identifier that is
the same as the last two digits of the
lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the
same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used
with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens and
press 2. A menu will be displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an
identifier and press J to save changes and exit.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 299
Non-CPU Lens Data
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Non-CPU lenses can be attached via a mount adapter (available
separately). Use Non-CPU lens data to record the focal length
and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses, allowing them to be
used with on-camera vibration reduction and certain other
camera features.
• Lens number: Choose a number to identify the lens.
• Focal length (mm): Enter the lens focal length.
• Maximum aperture: Enter the maximum aperture.
Clean Image Sensor
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or
the body cap is removed may adhere to the image sensor and
affect your photographs. The Clean image sensor option
vibrates the sensor to remove dust.
Option
Description
Clean now Perform image sensor cleaning immediately.
• Clean at shutdown: The image sensor is automatically
Automatic
cleaned during shutdown each time the camera is turned
cleaning
off.
• Cleaning off: Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
300 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX-D (for more information, refer to Capture NX-D
online help). Image Dust Off cannot be used with small or
medium-sized NEF (RAW) images.
An FX lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended
when recording Image Dust Off reference data. When using a
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
1 Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options
and press J. To exit without acquiring
image dust off data, press G.
• Start: A message will be displayed.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor
before starting. A message will be
displayed when cleaning is
complete.
2 Frame a featureless white object in the display.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
display and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 301
3 Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or
too dark, the camera may be unable
to acquire Image Dust Off reference
data and a message will be displayed.
Choose another reference object and
repeat the process from Step 1.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor
cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and then start only if the
dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
D Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or
at different apertures. Reference images
cannot be viewed using computer imaging
software. A grid pattern is displayed when
reference images are viewed on the camera.
302 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Image Comment
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D. The comment is also visible on the shooting data
page in the photo information display. The following options are
available:
• Input comment: Input a comment as described in “Text Entry”
(0 162). Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs. Highlight Attach
comment and press 2 to turn it on or
off. After choosing the desired setting,
press J to exit.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 303
Copyright Information
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are
taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data
shown in the photo information display and can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D. The following options
are available:
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described in “Text Entry”
(0 162). Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
in “Text Entry” (0 162). Copyright holder names can be up to
54 characters long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright information
to all subsequent photographs.
Highlight Attach copyright
information and press 2 to turn it on
or off. After choosing the desired
setting, press J to exit.
D Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or
transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept
liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the
Copyright information option.
304 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Beep Options
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when:
• The self-timer is in operation
• Time-lapse recording ends
• The camera focuses in photo mode (AF-S selected for focus
mode; Focus selected for Custom Setting a2, AF-S priority
selection; and Off selected for Silent photography)
• The touch screen is used for keyboard entry
The Beep options menu contains the following items:
• Beep on/off: Turn the beep speaker on or off, or select Off (touch
controls only) to disable the beep during keyboard entry
while enabling it for other purposes.
• Volume: Adjust beep volume.
• Pitch: Choose the pitch of the beep from High and Low.
Touch Controls
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
• Enable/disable touch controls: Select Disable to prevent accidental
use of touch-screen controls, or Playback only to enable
touch-screen controls in playback mode only.
• Full-frame playback flicks: Choose whether the next image in fullframe playback is displayed by flicking left or by flicking right.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 305
HDMI
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (0 346).
Location Data
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for use when the camera is connected to a device
that provides location data, namely a GPS receiver or a smart
device running the SnapBridge app (for more information on
SnapBridge, see the app’s online help).
• Standby timer: If Enable is selected when a GPS receiver is
connected, the exposure meters will turn off automatically if
no operations are performed for the period specified Custom
Setting c3 (Power off delay) > Standby timer, reducing the
drain on the battery.
• Position: View the location data supplied by the GPS receiver or
smart device (the items displayed vary with the source).
• Set clock from satellite: Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock
with the time reported by the GPS device.
306 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Wireless Remote (WR) Options
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for optional WR-R10 wireless remote controllers
and for optional radio-controlled flash units that support
Advanced Wireless Lighting.
LED Lamp
Enable or disable the status LEDs on a WR-R10 wireless remote
controller mounted on the camera. For more information, see
the documentation supplied with the wireless remote controller.
Link Mode
Choose a link mode for WR-R10 wireless remote controllers
mounted on other cameras or radio-controlled flash units that
support Advanced Wireless Lighting. Be sure that the same
mode is selected for the other devices.
• Pairing: To pair the camera with other devices, mount the
WR-R10 on the camera and press the pairing button.
• PIN: Connect using a four-digit PIN
code. Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits
and press 1 or 3 to change, then press
J to enter and display the selected PIN.
Regardless of the option selected for Link mode, signals from
paired wireless remote controllers will always be received by the
WR-R10. Users of the WR-1 wireless remote controller will need
to select pairing as the WR-1 link mode.
D The WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller
Be sure the firmware for the WR-R10 has been updated to the latest
version (version 3.0 or later). For information on firmware updates, see
the Nikon website for your area.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 307
Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Choose the role played by the Fn button on optional wireless
remote controllers equipped with an Fn button. See Custom
Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) for more information.
Option
A
F
D
C
B
AF-ON
AF lock only
AE lock (Reset on release)
AE lock only
AE/AF lock
Option
r
h
q
4
FV lock
cDisable/enable
Preview
+ NEF (RAW)
None
Airplane Mode
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Select Enable to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and
Wi-Fi functions. The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functions of optional
peripheral devices connected to the camera can only be
disabled by disconnecting the devices.
Connect to Smart Device
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for connection to a smart device. For information
on connecting to smart devices, see SnapBridge online help or
the Network Guide.
308 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Connect to PC
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for connection to computers using the camera’s
built-in Wi-Fi. For more information, see the Network Guide.
Wireless Transmitter (WT-7)
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for connection to computers or ftp servers via
wireless or Ethernet networks. This option is available only when
an optional WT-7 wireless transmitter is connected. See the
WT-7 manual for details.
Conformity Marking
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
View some of the standards with which the camera complies.
A Wireless Connections
For information on establishing wireless connections to computers or
smart devices, see the Network Guide, available from the Nikon
Download Center:
Z 7: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/492/Z_7.html
Z 6: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/493/Z_6.html
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 309
Battery Info
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
View information on the battery
currently inserted in the camera.
• Charge: The current battery level
expressed as a percentage.
• No. of shots: The number of times the
shutter has been released with the
current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that
the camera may sometimes release the shutter without
recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset
white balance.
• Battery age: A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k)
indicates that battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that
the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should
be replaced. Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures
under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in
charging life; the battery age display will however return to
normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature
of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
Slot Empty Release Lock
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be
recorded (they will however be displayed in demo mode). If
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
310 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Save/Load Settings
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the
memory card (if the card is full, an error will be displayed). Use
this option to share settings among cameras of the same model.
Playback menu
Playback display options
Image review
After delete
After burst, show
Rotate tall
Photo shooting menu
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control (Custom
Picture Controls are saved as
Auto)
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Photo shooting menu (continued)
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Vibration reduction (settings vary
with lens)
Auto bracketing
Silent photography
Movie shooting menu
File naming
Choose image area
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control (Custom
Picture Controls are saved as
Auto)
Active D-Lighting
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 311
Movie shooting menu (continued)
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Vibration reduction (settings vary
with lens)
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
Headphone volume
Timecode (excepting Timecode
origin)
Setup menu
Language
Time zone and date (excepting
Date and time)
Limit monitor mode selection
Information display
Non-CPU lens data
Clean image sensor
Image comment
Copyright information
Beep options
Touch controls
HDMI
Location data (excepting
Position)
Wireless remote (WR) options
Assign remote (WR) Fn button
Slot empty release lock
Custom Settings
All Custom Settings except d3
(Sync. release mode options)
Settings saved using the camera or other cameras of the same
model can be restored by selecting Load settings. Note that
Save/load settings is only available when a memory card is
inserted in the camera, and that the Load settings option is only
available if the card contains saved settings.
D Saved Settings
Settings are saved in a file with a name beginning with “NCSET” and
ending with three characters that differ from camera to camera. The
camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed.
312 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Reset All Settings
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Reset all settings except Language and Time zone and date to
their default values. Copyright information and other usergenerated entries are also reset. We recommend that you save
settings using the Save/load settings option in the setup menu
before performing a reset.
Firmware Version
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
View the current camera firmware version.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 313
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
To view the retouch menu, select the
N tab in the camera menus.
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera.
7
k
8
i
j
Z
Option
0
NEF (RAW) processing
317
Trim
320
Resize
321
D-Lighting
323
Red-eye correction
323
Straighten
324
Option
a
e
o
9
p
0
Distortion control
324
Perspective control
325
Image overlay 1
326
Trim movie
329
Side-by-side comparison 2
329
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.
2 Can only be displayed by pressing i and selecting Retouch in full-frame playback when a
retouched image or original is displayed.
314 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1 Select an item in the retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2
to select.
2 Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J. To
view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X button.
D Retouch
In the case of images recorded at image quality settings of NEF +
JPEG, only the NEF (RAW) image will be retouched. The camera may
not be able to display or retouch images created with other
devices.
3 Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.
D Power off Delay
The display will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no
actions are performed for a brief period. Any unsaved changes will
be lost. To increase the time the display remains on, choose a
longer menu display time using Custom Setting c3 (Power off
delay) > Menus.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 315
4 Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy.
Retouched copies are indicated by a
p icon.
D Retouching the Current Image
To create a retouched copy of the current image, press i and select
Retouch.
D Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although (with the exception of Trim movie) each option can
be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of
detail). Options that cannot be applied to the current image are grayed
out and unavailable.
D Image Quality and Size
Except in the case of copies created with NEF (RAW) processing, Trim,
and Resize, copies are the same size as the original. Copies created
from JPEG images are the same quality as the original, while cropped
and resized copies created from NEF (RAW) and TIFF (RGB) images are
saved in JPEG finem format.
316 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs. If you displayed
the retouch menu by pressing the G button, you can use this
option to copy multiple images.
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in
the retouch menu and press 2.
2 Choose how images are selected.
Choose from the following options:
• Select image(s): Select one or more
images manually.
• Select date: Create JPEG copies of all
the NEF (RAW) images taken on
selected dates.
• Select all images: Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW)
images on the memory card (proceed to Step 4).
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 317
3 Select photographs.
If you chose Select image(s) in Step
2, a picture selection dialog will be
displayed listing only NEF (RAW)
images created with this camera.
Highlight images using the multi
selector and press the W (Q) button
to select or deselect; selected images are indicated by a L
icon. To view the highlighted image full screen, press and
hold the X button. Press J to proceed to Step 4 when your
selection is complete.
If you chose Select date in Step 2, a
list of dates will be displayed.
Highlight dates using the multi
selector and press 2 to select or
deselect. Press J to select all NEF
(RAW) pictures taken on the chosen
dates and proceed to Step 4.
318 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
4 Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
Adjust the settings listed below, or select Original (if
available) to use the setting in effect when the photograph
was taken (the original settings are listed below the preview).
Note that exposure compensation can only be set to values
between −2 and +2 EV.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 Image quality........................... 104
6 High ISO NR ..............................183
2 Image size................................. 106
7 Color space ...............................182
3 White balance......................63, 98
8 Vignette control.......................184
4 Exposure compensation...........82
9 Active D-Lighting ....................110
5 Set Picture Control............94, 177 10 Diffraction compensation .....184
5 Copy the photographs.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a
JPEG copy of the selected
photograph (if multiple photos are
selected, a confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J
to create JPEG copies of the selected photos). To exit without
copying the photographs, press the K button.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 319
Trim
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected
photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow;
create a cropped copy as described below.
• To reduce size of the crop: Press W (Q).
• To increase size of the crop: Press X.
• To change the crop aspect ratio: Rotate the main command dial.
• To position the crop: Use the multi selector.
• To create a cropped copy: Press J to save
the current crop as a separate file. The
size of the copy varies with crop size
and aspect ratio and appears at upper
left in the crop display.
D Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.
320 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Resize
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Use the Resize option in the camera menu N tab to create small
copies of selected photographs.
1 Select Resize.
Highlight Resize in the N tab and
press 2.
2 Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
Highlight the desired size and press J.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 321
3 Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image(s) and press
2.
Highlight pictures and press W (Q) to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button). Selected
pictures are marked by a 8 icon.
Press J when the selection is
complete. Note that photographs taken at an image-area
setting of 1 : 1 (24×24), 16 : 9 (36×20), or (Z 7 only) 5 : 4
(30×24) cannot be resized.
4 Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Highlight Yes and press J
to save the resized copies.
D Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are
displayed.
322 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
D-Lighting
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Before
After
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to
save the retouched copy.
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
This option is used to correct “red-eye” and is available only with
photographs taken using a flash. The photograph selected for
red-eye correction can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm
the effects of red-eye correction and press J to create a copy.
Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the
expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied
to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check
the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 323
Straighten
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a straightened copy of the
selected image. Press 2 to rotate the
image clockwise by up to five degrees in
increments of approximately 0.25
degrees, 4 to rotate it counter-clockwise
(the effect can be previewed in the edit
display; note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a
square copy). Press J to save the retouched copy.
Distortion Control
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion. Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and
then make fine adjustments using the
multi selector, or select Manual to
reduce distortion manually. Note that
Auto is not available with photos taken using auto distortion
control. Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce
pincushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit
display; note that greater amounts of distortion control result in
more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the
retouched copy.
324 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Perspective Control
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective in photos taken looking up
from the base of a tall object. Use the
multi selector to adjust perspective
(note that greater amounts of
perspective control result in more of the
edges being cropped out). The results can be previewed in the
edit display. Press J to save the retouched copy.
Before
After
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 325
Image Overlay
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an
imaging application.
+
1 Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2. Image
overlay options will be displayed,
with Image 1 highlighted; press J to
display a picture selection dialog
listing only large NEF (RAW) images created with this camera
(small and medium NEF/RAW images cannot be selected).
2 Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the
first photograph in the overlay. To
view the highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X button.
Press J to select the highlighted
photograph and return to the preview display.
326 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3 Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight
Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as
described in Step 2.
4 Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and
optimize exposure for the overlay by
pressing 1 or 3 to select the gain
from values between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat for the second image. The
default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it.
The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
5 Preview the overlay.
To preview the composition, press 4
or 2 to place the cursor in the
Preview column, then press 1 or 3
to highlight Overlay and press J
(note that colors and brightness in
the preview may differ from the final image). To save the
overlay without displaying a preview, select Save. To return
to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press W (Q).
6 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay. After an
overlay is created, the resulting image
will be displayed full-frame.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 327
D Image Overlay
Only large NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bitdepth can be combined. The overlay is saved in JPEG finem format and
has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering,
shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation,
focal length, and image orientation) and values for white balance and
Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1. The current
image comment is appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright
information, however, is not copied.
328 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Trim Movie
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed
(0 135).
Side-by-Side Comparison
(see below)
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This
option is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by
pressing the i button and selecting Retouch when a copy or
original is played back full frame.
1 Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy (shown by a
p icon) or an original that has been
retouched.
2 Display retouch options.
Press i and select Retouch.
3 Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison
and press J.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 329
4 Compare the copy with the original.
The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy
on the right, with the options used to create the copy listed at
the top of the display. Press 4 or 2 to switch between the
source image and the retouched copy. To view the
highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the X button. If
the copy was created from two source images using Image
overlay, or if the source has been copied multiple times,
press 1 or 3 to view the other images. To exit to playback,
press the K button, or press J to exit to full-frame playback
with the highlighted image displayed.
Options used to create copy
Source image
Retouched copy
D Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that was protected or has since been deleted.
330 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
O My Menu/m Recent Settings
To view My Menu, select the O tab in
the camera menus.
The MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a
customized list of up to 20 items from the playback, photo
shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch
menus. If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My
Menu.
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described
below.
Adding Options to My Menu
1 Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add items
and press 2.
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu
containing the option you wish to
add and press 2.
Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings 331
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and
press J.
4 Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item
up or down in My Menu. Press J to
add the new item.
5 Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark.
Items indicated by a V icon cannot be
selected. Repeat Steps 1–4 to select
additional items.
332 Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings
Deleting Options from My Menu
1 Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.
2 Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to select
or deselect. Selected items are
indicated by a check mark.
3 Delete the selected items.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press J again to delete the
selected items.
D Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to
remove the selected item from My Menu.
Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings 333
Reordering Options in My Menu
1 Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move
and press J.
3 Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or
down in My Menu and press J.
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition
additional items.
4 Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to return to My
Menu.
334 Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings
Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select
m RECENT SETTINGS for O MY MENU > Choose tab.
1 Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight Choose
tab and press 2.
2 Select m RECENT SETTINGS.
Highlight m RECENT SETTINGS and
press J. The name of the menu will
change from “MY MENU” to “RECENT
SETTINGS.”
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O MY MENU for
m RECENT SETTINGS > Choose tab.
D Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and
press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O
again to delete the selected item.
Menu Guide > O My Menu/m Recent Settings 335
Connections
Expand your photographic horizons by connecting the camera
to smartphones or tablets (smart devices), computers or ftp
servers, or printers or HDMI devices.
Connecting to Smart Devices
Use SnapBridge to control the camera remotely from
a smart device and download pictures from the
camera.
SnapBridge is available free-ofcharge from the Apple App Store®
and on Google Play™.
Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news. For more
information on connecting to the camera and using the
SnapBridge app, see SnapBridge online help.
A Wireless Connections
For information on establishing wireless connections to computers or
smart devices, see the Network Guide, available from the Nikon
Download Center:
Z 7: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/492/Z_7.html
Z 6: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/493/Z_6.html
336 Connections
Connecting to Computers
To upload pictures to a computer, connect the camera via a
wireless network or using the supplied USB cable.
Connecting via USB
If the supplied USB cable is used to connect the camera to a
computer running ViewNX-i, you can copy pictures to the
computer, where they can be viewed, edited, and organized.
❚❚ Installing ViewNX-i
Download the ViewNX-i installer from the following website and
follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation
(existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as
earlier versions may not support the camera). An Internet
connection is required. For system requirements and other
information, see the Nikon website for your region.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
D Capture NX-D
Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change
settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.
Capture NX-D is available for download from:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Connections 337
❚❚ Copying Pictures to the Computer
For detailed instructions, see the online help for ViewNX-i.
1 Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory
card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
D Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged.
D Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting
interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.
338 Connections
2 Turn the camera on.
The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i will start (if a
message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2). If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start
automatically, launch ViewNX-i and click the “Import” icon.
D Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1 Under Import pictures and videos,
click Change program. A program
selection dialog will be displayed;
select Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
2 Double-click .
D Windows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may
display an AutoPlay prompt when the
camera is connected. Tap or click the
dialog and then tap or click
Nikon Transfer 2 to select
Nikon Transfer 2.
D macOS/OS X
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the
camera is connected and then launch Image Capture (an
application that comes with macOS or OS X) and select
Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the camera is
detected.
Connections 339
3 Click Start Transfer.
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
Click Start Transfer
D Transferring Movies
Do not attempt to transfer movies from the memory card while it is
inserted in another camera. Doing so could result in the movies
being deleted without being transferred.
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.
4 Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when
transfer is complete.
340 Connections
Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi)
The following methods can be used to connect to a computer
via Wi-Fi. For more information, see the Network Guide.
❚❚ Built-in Wi-Fi
Use the Connect to PC option in the camera setup menu to
connect to computers either directly or via a wireless router.
Connection via a wireless router
Direct wireless connection
❚❚ The WT-7 Wireless Transmitter
When the camera is connected to an optional WT-7 wireless
transmitter, the Wireless transmitter (WT-7) option in the
setup menu can be used for connection to computers or ftp
servers.
Use the WT-7 for connection to Ethernet networks and for more
reliable connections to wireless networks. With Camera Control Pro 2
(available separately), the camera can be controlled remotely and
pictures saved directly to the computer as they are taken.
Connections 341
Connecting to Printers
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
connected directly to the camera using the supplied USB cable.
When connecting the cable, do not use force or attempt to insert
the connectors at an angle.
When the camera and printer are turned on, a welcome screen
will be displayed, followed by a PictBridge playback display.
D Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)
cannot be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can
be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch
menu.
D Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an AC adapter and power
connector (available separately). When taking photographs to be
printed via direct USB connection, set Color space to sRGB.
D See Also
See “Error Messages“ (0 396) for information on what to do if an error
occurs during printing.
342 Connections
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1 Display the desired picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X button
to zoom in on the current frame (press K to exit zoom). To
view six pictures at a time, press the W (Q) button. Use the
multi selector to highlight pictures, or press the X button to
display the highlighted picture full frame.
2 Adjust printing options.
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options
supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default
option, select Printer default). After selecting an option,
press J to return to the printer settings menu.
• Page size: Choose a page size.
• No. of copies: This option is listed only when pictures are
printed one at a time. Press 1 or 3 to choose number of
copies (maximum 99).
• Border: Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.
• Print date: Choose whether to print the dates of recording on
photos.
• Cropping: This option is listed only when pictures are printed
one at a time. To exit without cropping, highlight No
cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,
highlight Crop and press 2. A crop selection dialog will be
displayed; press X to increase the size of the crop, W (Q) to
decrease, and use the multi selector to position the crop.
Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at
large sizes.
Connections 343
3 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel
printing before all copies have been printed, press J.
Printing Multiple Pictures
1 Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.
2 Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures for printing. Press 4 or 2 to scroll
through pictures (to view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X button) and press 1 or 3 to
choose the number of prints. To deselect a picture, set the
number of prints to zero.
• Index print: Create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the
memory card. Note that if the memory card contains more
than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.
A warning will be displayed if the page size selected in
Step 3 is too small for an index print.
3 Adjust printing options.
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 of “Printing
Pictures One at a Time” (0 343).
4 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel
printing before all copies have been printed, press J.
344 Connections
Connecting to HDMI Devices
The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable
(0 413) or a type C HDMI cable (available separately from thirdparty suppliers) can be used to connect the camera to highdefinition video devices. Always turn the camera off before
connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
Connect to camera
Connect to high-definition device
(choose cable with connector for
HDMI device)
❚❚ HDMI Displays
After connecting the camera to an HDMI television or other
display, tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the
camera on and press the K button. During playback, images will
be displayed on the television screen. Volume can be adjusted
using television controls; the camera controls cannot be used.
Connections 345
HDMI Recorders
The camera can record video directly to
connected HDMI recorders. Some
recorders will even start and stop
recording in response to camera
controls. Use the HDMI option in the
setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI
output.
• Output Resolution: Choose the format for images output to the
HDMI device. If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically
select the appropriate format.
• Advanced: Adjust the settings below.
- Output range: Auto is recommended in most situations. If the
camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal
output range for the HDMI device, you can choose Limited
range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 16
to 235 or Full range for devices with an RGB video signal
input range of 0 to 255. Choose Limited range if you notice a
loss of detail in shadows, Full range if shadows are “washed
out” or too bright.
346 Connections
- External recording control: Enabling external recording control
allows camera controls to be used to start and stop recording
when the camera is connected via HDMI to a third-party
recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol (Atomos
SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMO-series Monitor recorders). An icon
will be displayed in the camera monitor: A is displayed in
movie live view, while B is displayed during movie
recording. During recording, check the recorder and recorder
display to ensure that footage is being saved to the device
(note that the footage output to the device may be disrupted
while external recording control is in effect). The camera
display will turn off automatically when the standby timer
expires, ending HDMI output; when recording movies to an
external device, select Standby timer for Custom Setting c3
(Power off delay) and choose No limit or a time longer than
the anticipated recording time. See the manual provided
with the recorder for more information on device features
and operation.
- Output data depth: Choose from 8 bit and 10 bit.
Connections 347
- N-Log setting: Select On (cannot record to card) to preserve
details in highlights and shadows and avoid over-saturated
colors when recording movies. Choose this option (available
only when 10 bit is selected for Output data depth) when
recording footage that will later be color-corrected. The
footage will be recorded directly to the external device and
cannot be saved to the camera memory card. The ISO
sensitivity settings > Maximum sensitivity and ISO
sensitivity (Mode M) options in the movie shooting menu
can be set respectively to values of from ISO 1600 to 25600
and ISO 800 to 25600 (Z 7) or 51200 (Z 6).
- View assist: Choose On for a live preview of video footage
recorded with On (cannot record to card) selected for
N-Log setting. The colors in the preview will differ from those
of the final movie, but this has no effect on the footage
actually recorded.
D HDMI Output
HDMI output is not available at movie frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p,
1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion or when the camera is
connected to a device running SnapBridge or Camera Control Pro 2.
D 10-Bit Output Data Depth
10 bit can be used only with compatible recorders. Regardless of the
display mode selected, the camera monitor will turn on and the
viewfinder will remain blank. No photos can be taken; during movie
recording, the following additional restrictions apply when 3840 ×
2160 is selected for frame size:
• Movies are not recorded to memory cards inserted in the camera.
• Icons and characters in the monitor will display at low resolution.
• Selecting the DX image area on the Z 7 reduces the angle of view to
about 90%. The angle of view on the Z 6 is always about 90%.
D Zoom
Movies filmed at a frame size of 3840 × 2160 are displayed at a size of
1920 × 1080 when zoomed in.
348 Connections
On-Camera Flash Photography
The camera can be used with optional external flash units.
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”
You can take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera
accessory shoe or one or more remote flash units.
Camera-Mounted Flash Units
Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on
the camera as described in “Using an OnCamera Flash” (0 350).
Remote Flash Photography
Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless
flash control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL) as described
in “Remote Flash Photography” (0 362).
On-Camera Flash Photography 349
Using an On-Camera Flash
Follow the steps below to mount an optional flash unit on the
camera and take photographs using the flash.
1 Mount the unit on the accessory
shoe.
See the manual provided with the unit
for details.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative
voltages or voltages over 250 V applied
to the accessory shoe could not only
prevent normal operation, but damage
the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
2 Turn on the camera and flash unit.
The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (c) will
be displayed when charging is complete.
3 Adjust flash settings.
Choose the flash control mode (0 352) and flash mode
(0 354).
4 Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
5 Take pictures.
350 On-Camera Flash Photography
D Shutter Speed
Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional flash unit is used:
Mode
Shutter speed
b
Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s)
P, A
Set automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s) *
S
Value selected by user (1/200 s–30 s)
M
Value selected by user (1/200 s–30 s, Bulb, Time)
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or slow sync
with red-eye reduction is selected for flash mode.
On-Camera Flash Photography 351
Flash Control Mode
When a flash unit that supports unified
flash control (an SB-5000, SB-500,
SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the
camera, the flash control mode, flash
level, and other flash settings can be
adjusted using the Flash control > Flash
control mode item in the photo shooting menu (in the case of
the SB-5000, these settings can also be adjusted using the
controls on the flash unit). The options available vary with the
flash used, while the options displayed under Flash control
mode vary with the mode selected. Settings for other flash units
can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
• TTL: i-TTL mode. In the cases of the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300,
flash compensation can be adjusted using the Flash
compensation item in the photo shooting menu.
• Auto external flash: In this mode, output is adjusted automatically
according to the amount of light reflected by the subject; flash
compensation is also available. Auto external flash supports
“auto aperture” (qA) and “non-TTL auto” (A) modes. See the
flash unit manual for details.
• Distance-priority manual: Choose the distance to the subject; flash
output will be adjusted automatically. Flash compensation is
also available.
• Manual: Choose the flash level manually.
352 On-Camera Flash Photography
• Repeating flash: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is
open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash
level (Output), the maximum number of times the unit fires
(Times), and the number of times the flash fires per second
(Frequency, measured in Hertz). The options available for
Times vary depending on the options selected for Output and
Frequency; see the documentation provided with the flash
unit for details.
D Unified Flash Control
Unified flash control allows the camera and flash unit to share settings.
If a flash unit that supports unified flash control is mounted on the
camera, changes to flash settings made with either the camera or flash
unit are reflected on both devices, as are changes made using optional
Camera Control Pro 2 software.
D i-TTL Flash Control
When a CLS-compatible flash unit is set to TTL, the camera
automatically selects one of the following types of flash control:
• i-TTL balanced fill-flash: The flash unit emits a series of nearly invisible
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before the main flash.
The camera analyzes preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of
the frame and adjusts flash output for a natural balance between the
main subject and ambient background lighting.
• Standard i-TTL fill-flash: Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the
frame to standard level; the brightness of the background is not
taken into account. Recommended for shots in which the main
subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or when
exposure compensation is used. Standard i-TTL fill-flash is activated
automatically when spot metering is selected.
On-Camera Flash Photography 353
Flash Modes
Use the Flash mode option in the photo shooting menu to
choose the flash mode. The options available depend on the
mode selected with the mode dial.
I
J
K
Option
Fill flash
(frontcurtain
sync)
Red-eye
reduction
(red-eye
reduction)
Slow sync +
red-eye
(red-eye
reduction
with slow
sync)
Slow sync
L (slow
sync)
Description
The flash fires with every shot. In modes P
and A, shutter speed will automatically be
set to values between 1/200 s (or 1/8000 s with
Auto FP High-Speed Sync) and 1/60 s.
Use for portraits. The flash fires with every
shot, but before it fires, the red-eye
reduction lamp on the flash unit or camera
lights to reduce “red-eye” (a flash unit with
red-eye reduction is required). Not
recommended with moving subjects or in
other situations in which quick shutter
response is required. Do not move camera
during shooting.
As for Red-eye reduction except that
shutter speed slows automatically to
capture background lighting at night or
under low light. Use when you want to
include background lighting in portraits.
Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent
blurring caused by camera shake.
As for Fill flash except that shutter speed
slows automatically to capture
background lighting at night or under low
light. Use when you want to capture both
subject and background. Use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blurring caused
by camera shake.
354 On-Camera Flash Photography
Available
in
b, P, S,
A, M
P, A
Available
in
Description
The flash fires just before the shutter
closes, creating the effect of a stream of
light behind moving light sources. Use of a
Rear-curtain
tripod is recommended to prevent
sync
blurring caused by camera shake.
(rearP, S, A, M
Selecting P or A after choosing this option
curtain
sets the flash mode to Slow sync. Note
sync)
that this option cannot be used with
studio flash systems, as the correct
synchronization cannot be obtained.
b, P, S,
Flash off
The flash does not fire.
A, M
Option
M
s
On-Camera Flash Photography 355
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3 EV to
+1 EV in increments of 1/3 EV, changing the brightness of the
main subject relative to the background. Flash output can be
increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections. In general,
choose positive values to make the main subject brighter,
negative values to make it darker.
To choose a value for flash
compensation, use the Flash
compensation item in the photo
shooting menu. At values other than
±0.0, a Y icon will appear in the display
and the control panel.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
356 On-Camera Flash Photography
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring
that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the
subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output
is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and
aperture. FV lock is not available in b mode.
To use FV lock:
1 Assign FV lock to a camera control.
Assign FV lock to a control using
Custom Setting f2 (Custom control
assignment).
2 Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.
Mount a CLS-compatible flash unit on the camera accessory
shoe.
3 Set the flash unit to the appropriate mode.
Turn the flash unit on and select TTL or Auto external flash
for Flash control > Flash control mode (SB-5000, SB-500,
SB-400, or SB-300) or set the flash control mode to TTL,
monitor pre-flash qA, or monitor pre-flash A (other flash
units; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for
details).
On-Camera Flash Photography 357
4 Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and
press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
5 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready
indicator (c) appears in the camera
display, press the control selected in
Step 1. The flash unit will emit a
monitor pre-flash to determine the
appropriate flash level. Flash output will be locked at this
level and FV lock icon (r) will appear in the camera display.
6 Recompose the photograph.
Flash output will remain locked at the
value metered in Step 5.
7 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
8 Release FV lock.
Press the control selected in Step 1 to release FV lock. Confirm
that the FV lock icon (r) is no longer displayed.
358 On-Camera Flash Photography
Flash Info for On-Camera Units
When a unit that supports unified flash control (the SB-5000,
SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the camera accessory
shoe, flash info can be viewed in the camera display by pressing
the DISP button in photo mode (0 15). The information
displayed varies with the flash control mode.
TTL
123
4
5
6
7
8
1 Flash-ready indicator................. 350
2 Bounce icon (displayed if flash
head is tilted upwards)
3 Zoom head position warning
(displayed if zoom head is not in
correct position)
4 Flash control mode ........... 186, 352
FP indicator .................................. 265
5 Flash compensation (TTL) ........ 352
6 Flash mode................................... 354
7 FV lock indicator ......................... 357
8 Flash compensation................... 356
Auto External Flash
1
2
1 Flash control mode ........... 186, 352
FP indicator .................................. 265
2 Auto external flash
compensation ............................ 352
On-Camera Flash Photography 359
Distance-Priority Manual
1
2
3
1 Flash control mode ........... 186, 352
FP indicator.................................. 265
2 Flash compensation
(distance-priority manual)...... 352
3 Distance........................................ 352
Manual
1
2
1 Flash control mode ........... 186, 352
FP indicator.................................. 265
2 Flash level..................................... 352
Repeating Flash
1
2
3
360 On-Camera Flash Photography
1 Flash control mode ........... 186, 352
2 Flash level (output) .................... 352
3 Number emitted (times)........... 352
Frequency .................................... 352
D Flash Info and Camera Settings
The flash information display shows
selected camera settings, including
shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,
and ISO sensitivity.
D Changing Flash Settings
Flash settings can be changed by pressing
the i button in the flash info display. The
options available vary with the flash unit
and the settings selected. You can also testfire the flash.
On-Camera Flash Photography 361
Remote Flash Photography
The camera can be used with one or more remote flash units
(Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using
a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “OnCamera Flash Photography” (0 349).
Throughout this chapter, operations involving an accessory connected
to the camera are indicated by C, operations involving remote flash
units by f. For more information on f, see the manual provided with
the flash unit.
Using Remote Flash Units
Remote flash units can be controlled via optical signals from a
flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe (optical AWL)
or via radio signals from a WR-R10 (available separately)
connected to the camera (radio AWL). These forms of flash
control can be combined as follows:
• Radio AWL with one or more remote flash
units (0 364)
• Optical AWL with one or more remote flash
units (0 375)
• Radio AWL with additional lighting
provided by a shoe-mounted flash unit
(0 374)
362 Remote Flash Photography
• Radio AWL combined with optical AWL
provided by a shoe-mounted flash unit
(0 383)
Remote Flash Photography 363
Radio AWL
Radio AWL is available with SB-5000 flash
units. Attach a WR-R10 wireless remote
controller to the camera and establish a
wireless connection between the flash units
and the WR-R10.
Establishing a Wireless Connection
Before using radio AWL, establish a wireless connection
between the WR-R10 and the remote flash units.
1 C: Connect the WR-R10.
For more information, see the documentation provided with
the WR-R10.
2 C: Select Radio AWL.
Select Radio AWL for Flash control >
Wireless flash options in the photo
shooting menu.
D The WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller
Be sure to update the WR-R10 firmware to version 3.0 or later; for
information on firmware updates, see the Nikon website for your area.
364 Remote Flash Photography
3 C: Choose a channel.
Set the WR-R10 channel selector to
the desired channel.
4 C: Choose a link mode.
Select Wireless remote (WR)
options > Link mode in the setup
menu and choose from the following
options:
• Pairing: The camera connects only to
devices with which it has previously been paired,
preventing signal interference from other devices in the
vicinity. Given that each device must be paired separately,
PIN is recommended when connecting to a large number of
devices.
• PIN: Communication is shared among all devices with the
same four-digit PIN, making this a good choice for
photography featuring a large number of remote devices. If
there are multiple cameras present that share the same PIN,
the flash units will be under the sole control of the camera
that connects first, preventing all other cameras from
connecting (the LEDs on the WR-R10 units connected to the
affected cameras will blink).
Remote Flash Photography 365
5 f: Establish a wireless connection.
Set the remote flash units to radio AWL remote mode and set
the devices to the channel you selected in Step 3, then pair
each of the remote units with the WR-R10 according to the
option selected in Step 4:
• Pairing: Initiate pairing on the remote unit and press the
WR-R10 pairing button. Pairing is complete when the LINK
lamps on the WR-R10 and flash unit flash orange and green;
once a connection is established, the LINK lamp on the
remote flash unit will light green.
• PIN: Use the controls on the remote flash unit to enter the
PIN you selected in Step 4. The LINK lamp on the remote unit
will light green once a connection is established.
6 f: Confirm that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit.
In radio AWL, the flash-ready indicator will light in the camera
display when all flash units are ready.
D Listing Remote Flash Units
To view the flash units currently controlled using radio AWL, select
Flash control > Radio remote flash info in the photo shooting menu.
The identifier (remote flash unit name) for each unit can be changed
using flash unit controls.
Connected flash unit
Group
366 Remote Flash Photography
Flash-ready indicator
D Reconnecting
As long as the channel, link mode, and other settings remain the same,
the WR-R10 will automatically connect to previously paired flash units
when you select remote mode and Steps 3–5 can be omitted. The flash
unit LINK lamp lights green when a connection is established.
Remote Flash Photography 367
Adjusting Flash Settings
After selecting Radio AWL for Flash control > Wireless flash
options in the photo shooting menu, select Group flash, Quick
wireless control, or Remote repeating for Remote flash
control and adjust settings as described below.
❚❚ Group Flash
Select this option to adjust settings separately for each group.
1 C: Select Group flash.
Select Group flash for Flash
control > Remote flash control in
the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select Group flash options.
Highlight Group flash options in the
flash control display and press 2.
3 C: Choose the flash control mode.
Choose the flash control mode and
flash level for the master flash and the
flash units in each group:
• TTL: i-TTL flash control
• qA: Auto aperture (available only
with compatible flash units)
• M: Choose the flash level manually
• – – (off): The units do not fire and the flash level cannot be
adjusted
368 Remote Flash Photography
4 f: Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A–F) for each of the remote flash units. The
master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.
5 C/f: Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the
documentation provided with the flash units for more
information. After arranging the units, press the i button in
the flash info display (0 386) and select c Test flash to testfire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
6 C: Take the photograph.
Remote Flash Photography 369
❚❚ Quick Wireless Control
Select this option to control overall flash compensation for, and
the relative balance between, groups A and B, while setting
output for group C manually.
1 C: Select Quick wireless control.
Select Quick wireless control for
Flash control > Remote flash
control in the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select Quick wireless control
options.
Highlight Quick wireless control
options in the flash control display
and press 2.
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
Choose the balance between groups
A and B.
Adjust flash compensation for groups
A and B.
370 Remote Flash Photography
Choose a flash control mode and
flash level for the units in group C:
• M: Choose the flash level manually.
• – –: The units in group C do not fire.
4 f: Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A, B, or C). The master flash can control up to
18 flash units in any combination.
5 C/f: Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the
documentation provided with the flash units for more
information. After arranging the units, press the i button in
the flash info display (0 386) and select c Test flash to test
fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
6 C: Take the photograph.
Remote Flash Photography 371
❚❚ Remote Repeating
When this option is selected, the flash units fire repeatedly while
the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect.
1 C: Select Remote repeating.
Select Remote repeating for Flash
control > Remote flash control in
the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select Remote repeating
options.
Highlight Remote repeating
options in the flash control display
and press 2.
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
Choose the flash level (Output), the
maximum number of times the flash
units fire (Times), and the number of
times the flash units fire per second
(Frequency).
Enable or disable selected groups.
Select ON to enable the selected
group, – – to disable the selected
group.
4 f: Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A–F) for each of the remote flash units. The
master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.
372 Remote Flash Photography
5 C/f: Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the
documentation provided with the flash units for more
information. After arranging the units, press the i button in
the flash info display (0 386) and select c Test flash to testfire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
6 C: Take the photograph.
Remote Flash Photography 373
Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit
Radio-controlled flash units can be combined
with any of the following flash units mounted
on the camera accessory shoe:
• SB-5000: Before attaching the flash unit, set it
to radio-controlled master flash mode (a d
icon will appear at the top left corner of the display) and
choose group or remote repeating flash control. Once the unit
is attached, settings can be adjusted using the controls on the
flash unit or the options listed in the camera menus under
Group flash options > Master flash or under “M” in the
Remote repeating options display.
• SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600: Configure the flash for
standalone use and use the controls on the flash unit to adjust
flash settings.
• SB-500, SB-400, SB-300: Mount the unit on the camera and adjust
settings using the camera Group flash options > Master flash
option.
374 Remote Flash Photography
Optical AWL
Remote flash units can be controlled via
optical signals from an optional flash unit
mounted on the camera accessory shoe and
functioning as a master flash (optical AWL; for
information on compatible flash units, see
“The Nikon Creative Lighting System”, 0 408). If the flash unit in
question is an SB-5000 or SB-500, settings can be adjusted from
the camera (see below); otherwise settings must be adjusted
using flash unit controls as described in the documentation
provided with the unit. For information on flash placement and
other topics, see the documentation provided with the flash
units.
Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500
Mount the flash unit on the camera
accessory shoe and select Optical AWL
for Flash control > Wireless flash
options in the photo shooting menu.
Group flash settings can be adjusted
using Flash control > Remote flash
control; the Remote flash control item for the SB-5000 also
offers Quick wireless control and Remote repeating settings.
D The SB-5000
When an SB-5000 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, Flash
control settings can also be changed using the controls on the flash
unit.
Remote Flash Photography 375
❚❚ Group Flash
Select this option to adjust settings separately for each group.
1 C: Select Group flash.
Select Group flash for Flash
control > Remote flash control in
the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select Group flash options.
Highlight Group flash options in the
flash control display and press 2.
3 C: Adjust settings for the master
flash.
Choose the flash control mode and
flash level for the master flash and the
flash units in each group:
• TTL: i-TTL flash control
• qA: Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash
units)
• M: Choose the flash level manually
• – – (off): The units do not fire and the flash level cannot be
adjusted
376 Remote Flash Photography
Choose a channel for the master flash.
If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, you must choose channel 3,
but otherwise you can choose any
channel between 1 and 4.
4 f: Set the remote flash units to the same channel as the
master flash.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected in Step 3.
5 f: Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A, B, or C, or if you are using an SB-500
master flash, A or B) for each remote flash unit. Although
there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may
be used, the practical maximum is three per group. With
more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash
units will interfere with performance.
6 C/f: Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the
documentation provided with the flash units for more
information. After arranging the units, press the test button
on the master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the
units are functioning normally. Flash units can also be testfired by pressing the i button in the flash info display (0 386)
and selecting c Test flash.
7 C/f: Take the photograph.
Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready
lights for all flash units are lit.
Remote Flash Photography 377
❚❚ Quick Wireless Control (SB-5000 Only)
Select this option to control overall flash compensation for, and
the relative balance between, groups A and B, while setting
output for group C manually.
1 C: Select Quick wireless control.
Select Quick wireless control for
Flash control > Remote flash
control in the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select Quick wireless control
options.
Highlight Quick wireless control
options in the flash control display
and press 2.
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
Choose the balance between groups
A and B.
Adjust flash compensation for groups
A and B.
378 Remote Flash Photography
Choose a flash control mode and
flash level for the units in group C:
• M: Choose the flash level manually
• – –: The units in group C do not fire.
Choose a channel for the master flash.
If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, you must choose channel 3,
but otherwise you can choose any
channel between 1 and 4.
4 f: Set the remote flash units to the same channel as the
master flash.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected in Step 3.
5 f: Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A, B, or C). Although there is no limit on the
number of remote flash units that may be used, the practical
maximum is three per group. With more than this number,
the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance.
6 C/f: Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the
documentation provided with the flash units for more
information. After arranging the units, press the test button
on the master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the
units are functioning normally. Flash units can also be testfired by pressing the i button in the flash info display (0 386)
and selecting c Test flash.
Remote Flash Photography 379
7 C/f: Take the photograph.
Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready
lights for all flash units are lit.
❚❚ Remote Repeating (SB-5000 Only)
When this option is selected, the flash units fire repeatedly while
the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect.
1 C: Select Remote repeating.
Select Remote repeating for Flash
control > Remote flash control in
the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select Remote repeating
options.
Highlight Remote repeating
options in the flash control display
and press 2.
380 Remote Flash Photography
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
Choose the flash level (Output), the
maximum number of times the flash
units fire (Times), and the number of
times the flash units fire per second
(Frequency).
Enable or disable selected groups.
Select ON to enable the selected
group, – – to disable the selected
group.
Choose a channel for the master flash.
If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, you must choose channel 3,
but otherwise you can choose any
channel between 1 and 4.
4 f: Set the remote flash units to the same channel as the
master flash.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected in Step 3.
Remote Flash Photography 381
5 f: Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A, B, or C) for each remote flash unit.
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash
units that may be used, the practical maximum is three per
group. With more than this number, the light emitted by the
remote flash units will interfere with performance.
6 C/f: Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the
documentation provided with the flash units for more
information. After arranging the units, press the test button
on the master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the
units are functioning normally. Flash units can also be testfired by pressing the i button in the flash info display (0 386)
and selecting c Test flash.
7 C/f: Take the photograph.
Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready
lights for all flash units are lit.
D Optical AWL
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the
light from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is
not mounted on a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections
from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode)
or the photocells on the remote flash units (qA mode), as this may
interfere with exposure. To prevent low-intensity timing flashes
emitted by the master flash from appearing in photographs taken at
short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high fnumbers). After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and
view the results in the camera display.
382 Remote Flash Photography
Optical/Radio AWL
Optical and radio AWL can be used together.
Radio flash control is provided by a WR-R10
connected to the camera, optical control by
an SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander or
an SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500
flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe. Before
proceeding, establish a wireless connection between the radiocontrolled flash units and the WR-R10 (0 364). If an SB-500 is
mounted on the camera accessory shoe, select Optical/radio
AWL for Flash control > Wireless flash options in the photo
shooting menu; with other flash units or the SU-800, this option
is selected automatically.
The only option available for Remote
flash control will be Group flash.
Choose a group (A–F) for each of the
remote flash units. Place opticallycontrolled flash units in groups A
through C and radio-controlled units in
groups D through F (to display options for groups D through F,
press 1 or 3 in the group flash options display).
Remote Flash Photography 383
Viewing Flash Info
The camera can display flash info for SB-5000 and SB-500 flash
units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and configured as
a master flash for optical AWL, as well as for remote flash units
controlled via radio AWL using a WR-R10. Flash info can be
viewed in the camera display by pressing the DISP button in
photo mode (0 15). The information displayed varies with the
flash control mode.
Group Flash
1
2
3
4
384 Remote Flash Photography
5
6
1 Flash-ready indicator 1 ............... 364
2 Remote flash control ................. 188
FP indicator.................................. 265
3 Remote flash control mode 2
.............................................. 187, 188
4 Group flash control mode 3
.............................................. 368, 376
Group flash mode ............. 368, 376
Flash level (output)/
flash compensation......... 368, 376
5 Channel 2.............................. 187, 364
6 Link mode 4 .................................. 364
Quick Wireless Control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Flash-ready indicator 1 ............... 364
2 Remote flash control ................. 188
FP indicator .................................. 265
3 Remote flash control mode 2
.............................................. 187, 188
4 A : B ratio.............................. 370, 378
5 Flash compensation.......... 370, 378
6 Group C flash control mode
and flash level (output) ... 370, 378
7 Channel 2 .............................. 187, 364
8 Link mode 4................................... 364
Remote Repeating
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Flash-ready indicator 1 ............... 364
Remote flash control ................. 188
Flash level (output) ........... 372, 380
Remote flash control mode 2
.............................................. 187, 188
Number emitted (times)... 372, 380
Frequency............................ 372, 380
Group status
(enabled/disabled) .......... 372, 380
Channel 2 .............................. 187, 364
Link mode 4................................... 364
1 Displayed in radio AWL when all flash units are ready.
2 Optical AWL is indicated by Y, radio AWL by Z, joint optical and radio AWL by Y and Z.
Optical AWL channel for joint optical and radio AWL is displayed only when SB-500 is used as
master flash.
3 Icons are displayed for each group when joint optical and radio AWL is used.
4 Displayed only when radio AWL or join optical and radio AWL is used.
Remote Flash Photography 385
D Flash Info and Camera Settings
The flash information display shows
selected camera settings, including
shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,
and ISO sensitivity.
D Changing Flash Settings
Flash settings can be changed by pressing
the i button in the flash info display. The
options available vary with the flash unit
and the settings selected. You can also testfire the flash.
386 Remote Flash Photography
Troubleshooting
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by
following the steps below. Check this list before consulting your
retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
1
Check the common problems listed in the following sections:
• “Problems and Solutions” (0 388)
• “Indicators and Error Messages” (0 394)
2
Turn the camera off and remove the battery. After waiting for about a minute,
re-insert the battery and turn the camera on.
D If you have just finished shooting, wait at least a minute before removing the
battery, as the camera may still be writing data to the memory card.
STEP
3
Search Nikon websites.
For support information and answers to frequently asked
questions, visit the website for your country or region (0 xxii).
To download the latest firmware for your camera, visit:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com
STEP
4
Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
STEP
STEP
D Restoring Default Settings
Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features
may be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or
features that are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings
using the Reset all settings item in the setup menu (0 313). Note,
however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information, and
other user-generated entries will also be reset. We recommend that
you save settings using the Save/load settings option in the setup
menu before performing a reset.
Troubleshooting 387
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the
problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off,
remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter,
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been
recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power
source.
The viewfinder or monitor does not turn on:
• Choose a different monitor mode using the monitor mode button
(note that you may first need to enable the desired mode using the
Limit monitor mode selection option in the setup menu).
• Dust, lint, or other foreign matter on the eye sensor may prevent it
functioning normally. Clean the eye sensor with a blower.
The viewfinder is out of focus: Rotate the diopter adjustment control to focus
the viewfinder. If this does not correct the problem, select AF-S, singlepoint AF, and the center focus point, and then frame a high-contrast
subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter
adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the
viewfinder.
The displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom
Setting c3 (Power off delay).
The control panel is unresponsive and dim: Control panel response times and
brightness vary with temperature.
388 Troubleshooting
Shooting
The camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
The shutter-release is disabled:
• The memory card is full.
• Release locked is selected for Slot empty release lock in the setup
menu and no memory card is inserted.
• Mode S selected with Bulb or Time chosen for shutter speed.
The camera is slow to respond to the shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom
Setting d4 (Exposure delay mode).
Only one shot is taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed in continuous
release modes: Turn HDR off.
Photos are out of focus: To focus using autofocus, select AF-S, AF-C, or AF-F for
focus mode. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (0 53), use
manual focus or focus lock.
Beeps do not sound:
• Off is selected for Beep options > Beep on/off in the setup menu.
• AF-C is selected for focus mode.
• On is selected for Silent photography in the photo shooting menu.
• The camera is in movie mode.
The full range of shutter speeds is not available: A flash in use. Flash sync speed
can be selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when
using compatible flash units, choose 1/200 s (Auto FP) to access the full
range of shutter speeds.
Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway: When AF-C is
selected for focus mode, focus can be locked by pressing the center of
the sub-selector.
The focus point cannot be changed: Focus-point selection is unavailable in
auto-area AF; choose another AF-area mode.
The camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off.
Troubleshooting 389
Photographs and movies do not appear to have the same exposure as the preview
shown in the display: To preview the effects of changes to settings that
affect exposure and color, select On for Custom Setting d8 (Apply
settings to live view). Note that changes to Monitor brightness and
Viewfinder brightness have no effect on images recorded with the
camera.
Flicker or banding appears in movie mode: Select Flicker reduction in the
movie shooting menu and choose an option that matches the frequency
of the local AC power supply.
Bright regions or bands appear in the view through the lens: The shot is being
framed under flashing sign, flash, or other light source with brief
duration.
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean the front and rear lens elements. If the
problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning.
Shooting ends unexpectedly or does not start: Shooting may end automatically
to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if the ambient
temperature is high or the camera has been used extensively for burst
shooting, movie recording, or the like. If you are unable to shoot because
the camera has overheated, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then
try again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does
not indicate a malfunction.
Image artifacts appear in the display during shooting: “Noise” (randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you
zoom in on the view through the lens. Randomly-spaced bright pixels,
fog, or bright spots may also arise as a result of increases in the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits during shooting; turn the
camera off when it is not in use. At high ISO sensitivities, noise may
become more noticeable in long exposures or in pictures recorded when
the camera temperature is elevated. Note that the distribution of noise
in the display may differ from that in the final picture. To reduce noise,
adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed, or Active
D-Lighting.
390 Troubleshooting
The camera cannot measure white balance: The subject is too dark or too bright.
Images cannot be selected as source for preset white balance: The images in
question were created with a different model of camera.
White balance bracketing is unavailable:
• An NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option is selected for image
quality.
• Multiple exposure or HDR (high dynamic range) photography is on.
The effects of Picture Controls differ from image to image: Auto is selected for Set
Picture Control, a Picture Control based on Auto is selected, or A (auto)
is selected for Quick sharp, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results
over a series of photographs, choose another setting.
Metering cannot be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect.
Exposure compensation cannot be used: Choose mode P, S, or A.
Noise (colored splotches or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable
long exposure noise reduction.
The AF-assist illuminator does not light:
• Select On for Custom Setting a12 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator).
• The illuminator does not light in movie mode or when AF-C or MF is
selected for focus mode.
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for
Microphone sensitivity in the movie shooting menu.
Playback
NEF (RAW) images are not played back: The pictures were taken at image
qualities of NEF + JPEG.
The camera does not display pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures
recorded with other makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder.
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall in the playback menu.
• The photos are displayed in image review.
• The camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken.
Troubleshooting 391
Pictures cannot be deleted: The pictures are protected. Remove protection.
Pictures cannot be retouched: The picture cannot be edited with this camera.
The camera displays a message stating that the folder contains no images: Select All
for Playback folder.
Pictures cannot be printed: NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos cannot be printed by
direct USB connection. Transfer the photos to a computer and print
them using Capture NX-D. NEF (RAW) photos can be saved in JPEG
format using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.
Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices: Confirm that an HDMI cable
(available separately) is connected.
Output to HDMI devices does not function as expected:
• Check that the HDMI cable is correctly connected.
• Select Off for HDMI > Advanced > External recording control in the
setup menu.
• Check again after selecting Reset all settings in the setup menu.
The Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image
sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor. Dust
off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed
cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed; similarly, dust off reference data recorded after image sensor
cleaning is performed cannot be used with photographs taken before
image sensor cleaning is performed.
Computers do not display NEF (RAW) images the same way as the camera does: Thirdparty software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active
D-Lighting, vignette control, or the like. Use Capture NX-D or ViewNX-i.
Pictures cannot be transferred to a computer: The computer operating system is
not compatible with the camera or image transfer software. Use a card
reader or card slot to copy the pictures to a computer.
392 Troubleshooting
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
• Confirm that Disable is selected for Airplane mode in the camera
setup menu.
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Connect to smart device > Pairing
(Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection in the camera setup menu.
• Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
The camera cannot connect to wireless printers and other wireless devices: This
camera can connect only to computers and smart devices.
Miscellaneous
The date of recording is not correct: The camera clock is less accurate than
most watches and household clocks. Check the clock regularly against
more accurate timepieces and reset as necessary.
Some menu items cannot be selected: Some options are not available at
certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted.
Troubleshooting 393
Indicators and Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear
in the control panel and camera display.
Indicators
The following indicators appear in the control panel and/or
camera display:
Indicator
Camera Control
display panel
H
H
(flashes)
F––
Bulb
(flashes)
Time
(flashes)
Busy
(flashes)
394 Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
Ready a fully-charged spare
Low battery.
battery.
Battery exhausted.
Recharge or replace battery.
Battery cannot be used.
Battery info
Contact Nikon-authorized
unavailable.
service representative.
Battery not supported. Replace with Nikon battery.
Battery temperature
Remove battery and wait for it
high.
to cool.
Ensure that the lens is correctly
attached and that retractable
lenses are extended. This
Lens is not correctly
indicator is also displayed
attached.
when a non-CPU lens is
attached via a mount adapter,
but in this case no action need
be taken.
Bulb selected in mode S.
Time selected in mode S.
Processing in progress.
Change shutter speed or select
mode M.
Wait until processing is
complete.
Indicator
Camera Control
display panel
Problem
Flash has fired at full
power; photo may be
underexposed.
Solution
Check photo in display; if
c
—
underexposed, adjust settings
(flashes)
and try again.
• Decrease ISO sensitivity.
• Use optional ND filter. In
Subject too bright;
mode:
photo will be
S Increase shutter speed
(Exposure
overexposed.
A Choose a smaller aperture
indicators and
(higher f-number)
shutter speed or
aperture display
• Increase ISO sensitivity.
flash)
• Use optional flash. In mode:
Subject too dark; photo
S Lower shutter speed
will be underexposed.
A Choose larger aperture
(lower f-number)
Memory insufficient to • Reduce quality or size.
record further pictures • Delete pictures after copying
Full
at current settings, or
important images to
(flashes)
camera has run out of
computer or other device.
file or folder numbers. • Insert new memory card.
Release shutter. If error persists
Err
or appears frequently, consult
Camera malfunction.
(flashes)
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Troubleshooting 395
Error Messages
Error messages in the camera display are sometimes
accompanied by indicators in the control panel.
Message
Control
panel
Solution
Turn camera off and
No memory card.
confirm that card is
correctly inserted.
• Use Nikon-approved
card.
• If error persists after card
has been repeatedly
Error accessing
ejected and reinserted,
memory card.
card may be damaged.
Cannot access this
Card,
Contact retailer or
memory card.
Err
Nikon-authorized
Insert another card. (flashes)
service representative.
Delete files or insert new
memory card after
Unable to create
copying important
new folder.
pictures to computer or
other device.
Memory card has
This card is not
For not been
Format memory card or
formatted.
(flashes) formatted for use insert new memory card.
Format the card.
in camera.
The internal
Wait for the internal
Unable to start live
temperature of
—
circuits to cool before
view. Please wait.
the camera is
resuming shooting.
high.
No viewable
Insert memory card
pictures on
containing viewable
memory card.
pictures.
Folder contains no
— No viewable
Use Playback folder item
images.
pictures in
in playback menu to select
folder(s) selected folder containing
for playback.
viewable pictures.
396 Troubleshooting
Problem
Camera cannot
[–E–] detect memory
card.
Message
Cannot display this
file.
Control
panel
—
Problem
File was edited on
computer or does
not comply with
DCF standards, or
file is corrupt.
Selected picture
cannot be
retouched.
Solution
File cannot be viewed on
camera.
Pictures created with
other devices cannot be
retouched.
• Movies created with
other devices cannot be
This movie cannot
Selected movie
edited.
—
be edited.
cannot be edited.
• Movies must be at least
two seconds long.
Check printer. To resume,
Check printer.
— Printer error.
select Continue (if
available) *.
Paper in printer is
Insert paper of correct size
Check paper.
— not of selected
and select Continue *.
size.
Paper is jammed Clear jam and select
Paper jam.
—
in printer.
Continue *.
Printer is out of Insert paper of selected
Out of paper.
—
paper.
size and select Continue *.
Check ink. To resume,
Check ink supply.
— Ink error.
select Continue *.
Printer is out of Replace ink and select
Out of ink.
—
ink.
Continue *.
* See printer manual for more information.
Cannot select this
file.
—
Troubleshooting 397
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on the camera display,
compatible accessories, cleaning and storing the camera, and
device specifications.
The Camera Display and Control Panel
Refer to this section for information on the indicators in the
camera display (monitor and viewfinder) and control panel. For
illustrative purposes, the displays are shown with all indicators
lit.
The Monitor: Photo Mode
The following indicators appear in the monitor in photo mode.
2 4 6 8 10
15
1 3 5 7 9 11 12 13 14 16
17
18
19
20
21
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
22
23
38 37 35 33 31 29 27 26 25 24
36 34 32 30 28
1
2
3
4
5
Shooting mode ..............................70 6
Flexible program indicator..........71 7
User setting mode.........................75 8
AF-area brackets ............................54 9
Interval timer indicator ............. 212 10
“Clock not set” indicator ..............40
398 Technical Notes
Flash mode ......................... 107, 354
Focus indicator...............................61
Release mode........................84, 111
Focus point .............................. 43, 54
Focus mode ..................52, 189, 243
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
AF-area mode .............. 54, 189, 243
Active D-Lighting......110, 182, 241
Picture Control............. 94, 177, 241
White balance........63, 98, 170, 240
Image quality......................104, 166
Image area..................119, 165, 239
Image size............................106, 166
Wi-Fi connection indicator .......109
i icon.......................................13, 21
Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator ......................................191
WB bracketing indicator ...........195
ADL bracketing indicator..........198
HDR indicator...............................207
Multiple exposure indicator.....200
Position of current frame in
bracketing sequence................190
ADL bracketing amount ...........190
HDR exposure differential ........207
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure) ....................................200
Exposure indicator........................ 74
Exposure compensation
display............................................ 82
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash
bracketing...........................191
WB bracketing.......................195
ADL bracketing......................198
Bluetooth connection
indicator ......................................308
Airplane mode.............................308
Flash-ready indicator .................412
25 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) .................................... 34
26 Number of exposures
remaining ............................ 34, 463
27 ISO sensitivity ................................ 80
28 ISO sensitivity indicator .............. 80
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .... 81
29 Exposure compensation
indicator........................................ 82
30 Flash compensation indicator.... 356
31 Subject tracking............................ 58
32 Aperture.......................................... 72
33 Aperture lock icon...................... 281
34 Shutter speed ..........................71, 73
35 Flash sync indicator.................... 265
36 Shutter speed lock icon ............ 281
37 FV lock indicator ................ 357, 411
38 Metering ..................... 108, 185, 243
39 Autoexposure (AE) lock.........89, 90
40 Battery indicator ........................... 34
41 Flicker detection ......................... 185
42 Shutter type................................. 262
Silent photography ............. 67, 237
43 Exposure delay mode ................ 261
44 Vibration reduction
indicator............................. 112, 189
45 Touch shooting .......................10, 59
46 Live view preview indicator ..... 264
47 Temperature warning................ 400
Technical Notes 399
D Temperature Warnings
If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning
will be displayed together with a count-down timer (the timer turns
red when the thirty second mark is reached). In some cases, the timer
may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned on. When the
timer reaches zero, the shooting display will turn off automatically to
protect the camera’s internal circuits.
400 Technical Notes
❚❚ The Information Display
12 3 4 5 6
19
18
17
16
15
14
Shooting mode ............................. 70
Flexible program indicator ......... 71
User setting mode ........................ 75
Shutter speed lock icon.............281
Flash sync indicator....................265
Shutter speed ..........................71, 73
Aperture lock icon ......................281
Aperture.......................................... 72
Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator ......................................191
WB bracketing indicator ...........195
ADL bracketing indicator..........198
HDR indicator...............................207
Multiple exposure indicator.....200
10 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) .................................... 34
11 Number of exposures
remaining............................. 34, 463
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7 8
9
10
11
12
13
12 Exposure indicator ....................... 74
Exposure compensation
display ........................................... 82
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash
bracketing........................... 191
WB bracketing....................... 195
ADL bracketing ..................... 198
13 i icon.......................................13, 21
14 ISO sensitivity ................................ 80
15 ISO sensitivity indicator .............. 80
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .... 81
16 FV lock indicator ................ 357, 411
17 Autoexposure (AE) lock.........89, 90
18 Flash compensation indicator.... 356
19 Exposure compensation
indicator........................................ 82
Exposure compensation
value............................................... 82
Technical Notes 401
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
20 Bluetooth connection
indicator...................................... 308
Airplane mode ............................ 308
21 Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 109
22 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator...................................... 183
23 Shutter type................................. 262
Silent photography..............67, 237
24 Exposure delay mode................ 261
25 Interval timer indicator ............. 212
“Clock not set” indicator ..............40
26 Flash control mode .................... 186
27 “Beep” indicator.......................... 305
28 Battery indicator ............................34
402 Technical Notes
29
30
31
32
33
34
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Built-in Wi-Fi ....................... 109, 341
Release mode........................84, 111
AF-area mode...............54, 189, 243
Focus mode ..................52, 189, 243
Vibration reduction........... 112, 189
Active D-Lighting ..... 110, 182, 241
Metering..................... 108, 185, 243
Image size ........................... 106, 166
White balance ....... 63, 98, 170, 240
Picture Control .............94, 177, 241
Image quality ..................... 104, 166
Flash mode ......................... 107, 354
Temperature warning ............... 400
The Monitor: Movie Mode
The following indicators appear in the monitor in movie mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
12
11
10
7
8
9
1 Recording indicator...................... 45
“No movie” indicator.................... 46
2 External recording control........346
3 Frame size and rate/image
quality.................................116, 239
4 Time remaining ............................. 45
5 Time code .....................................246
6 File name ......................................239
7 Wind noise reduction ................ 245
8 Headphone volume ................... 245
9 Release mode
(still photography)...................... 84
10 Sound level .................................. 118
11 Microphone sensitivity..... 118, 244
12 Frequency response................... 245
13 Electronic VR indicator ..... 120, 243
Technical Notes 403
The Viewfinder: Photo Mode
The following indicators appear in the viewfinder in photo
mode.
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13
45
44
43
14
15
42
41
40
39
38
37
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
36 35 33 31 29 28 27 26 24 23
34 32 30
25
1 Battery indicator ............................34
2 Live view preview indicator ..... 264
3 Vibration reduction
indicator............................. 112, 189
4 Flash mode.......................... 107, 354
5 Release mode ........................84, 111
6 Focus mode...................52, 189, 243
7 AF-area mode...............54, 189, 243
8 Active D-Lighting
indicator.................... 110, 182, 241
9 Picture Control
indicator.......................94, 177, 241
10 White balance .......63, 98, 170, 240
11 Image quality ..................... 104, 166
404 Technical Notes
12 Image size ........................... 106, 166
13 Image area ................. 119, 165, 239
14 Bluetooth connection
indicator...................................... 308
Airplane mode ............................ 308
15 Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 109
16 Focus point .............................. 43, 54
17 Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator...................................... 191
WB bracketing indicator........... 195
ADL bracketing indicator ......... 198
HDR indicator .............................. 207
Multiple exposure indicator .... 200
18 Position of current frame in
bracketing sequence................190
ADL bracketing amount ...........190
HDR exposure differential ........207
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure) ....................................200
19 Subject tracking ............................ 58
20 Flash compensation indicator ....356
21 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over
1000 exposures) .......................... 34
22 Flash-ready indicator .................412
23 Number of exposures
remaining............................. 34, 463
24 ISO sensitivity ................................ 80
25 ISO sensitivity indicator............... 80
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ..... 81
26 Exposure compensation
indicator ........................................ 82
27 Exposure indicator........................ 74
Exposure compensation
display............................................ 82
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash
bracketing...........................191
WB bracketing.......................195
ADL bracketing......................198
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Aperture.......................................... 72
Aperture lock icon...................... 281
Shutter speed ..........................71, 73
Flash sync indicator.................... 265
FV lock indicator ................ 357, 411
Autoexposure (AE) lock.........89, 90
User setting mode........................ 75
Metering ..................... 108, 185, 243
Focus indicator.............................. 61
Exposure delay mode ................ 261
Shutter type................................. 262
Silent photography ............. 67, 237
Shooting mode ............................. 70
Flexible program indicator......... 71
Flicker detection ......................... 185
Shutter speed lock icon ............ 281
Interval timer indicator ............. 212
“Clock not set” indicator ............. 40
AF-area brackets ........................... 54
Temperature warning................ 400
Technical Notes 405
The Viewfinder: Movie Mode
The following indicators appear in the viewfinder in movie
mode.
1
2
3
4
13
12
11
10
9
8
5
6
7
1 Frame size and rate/image
quality................................. 116, 239
2 File name ...................................... 165
3 External recording control ....... 346
4 Recording indicator ......................45
“No movie” indicator ....................46
5 Time code..................................... 246
6 Time remaining..............................45
406 Technical Notes
7 Release mode
(still photography) ......................84
8 Sound level .................................. 118
9 Microphone sensitivity .... 118, 244
10 Frequency response .................. 245
11 Wind noise reduction................ 245
12 Headphone volume................... 245
13 Electronic VR indicator..... 120, 243
The Control Panel
1
2
3 4
5
12
11
6
10
7
9
8
1 Shutter-speed lock icon ............281 8 Number of exposures
remaining ............................ 34, 463
2 Shutter speed ..........................71, 73
9 Release mode ................................ 84
3 Exposure compensation
indicator ........................................ 82 10 ISO sensitivity ................................ 80
Exposure compensation value ..... 82 11 Flash compensation indicator.... 356
“Flash off” icon ............................ 107
4 Aperture lock icon ......................281
5 Aperture.......................................... 72 12 Flash sync indicator.................... 265
6 Battery indicator ........................... 34
7 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) .................................... 34
Technical Notes 407
The Nikon Creative Lighting System
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers
improved communication between the camera and compatible
flash units for improved flash photography.
CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
SB-R200
✔ ✔2 ✔ — — ✔ ✔
✔
—
✔3
✔3
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔ — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔4 — — ✔4 ✔4
— — — — — — —
SB-300
✔2
SB-400
✔2
SB-500
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
SU-800
✔
SB-600
SB-910
SB-900
SB-800
✔
SB-700
SB-5000
i-TTL balanced fill
flash 1
Standard i-TTL fill
flash
qA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
Distance-priority
GN
manual
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL
Single flash
408 Technical Notes
SB-R200
✔ — — ✔5 — — —
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ — —
✔6
✔6
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ — —
✔ ✔ ✔ — — — —
✔7
—
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔
—
—
— — ✔ — — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔ 10
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔4
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
SB-300
—
SB-400
✔
SU-800
✔ — ✔4 ✔ — — —
✔ — ✔4 — — — —
SB-500
✔
✔
SB-600
SB-910
SB-900
SB-800
✔
✔
SB-700
SB-5000
Remote
Master
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Remote flash control
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless flash
[A:B]
control
qA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless flash
[A:B]
control
Auto aperture/
qA/A
Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless
Lighting
Color information communication
(flash)
Color information communication
(LED light)
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 8
FV lock 9
Red-eye reduction
Camera modeling illumination
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
Technical Notes 409
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not available with spot metering.
Can also be selected with flash unit.
qA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings.
Can only be selected using the camera Flash control option.
Available only during close-up photography.
Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master flash.
Supports the same features as remote flash units with optical AWL.
Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when the flash is set to emit monitor pre-flashes in
qA or A flash control mode.
10 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as
a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is
not equipped with a flash.
A Modeling Illumination
Pressing the control to which Preview has been assigned using
Custom Setting f2 (Custom control assignment) causes CLScompatible flash units to emit a modeling flash. This feature can be
used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the total lighting
effect achieved with multiple flash units; the effect is best viewed by
looking directly at the subject rather than at the camera display.
Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom Setting e5
(Modeling flash).
A Studio Strobe Lighting
To adjust the color and brightness of the view through the lens so that
shots are easier to frame, select Off for Custom Setting d8 (Apply
settings to live view).
410 Technical Notes
D Flash Compensation
In i-TTL and auto aperture (qA) flash control modes, the flash
compensation selected with the optional flash unit or the camera
Flash control option is added to the flash compensation selected with
the Flash compensation option in the photo shooting menu.
D Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual
modes.
SB-80DX,
SB-30, SB-27 1,
SB-28DX, SB-28, SB-50DX, SB-23, SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-26, SB-25,
SB-29, SB-21B, SB-20, SB-16B,
SB-24
SB-15
SB-29S
Flash mode
A Non-TTL auto
✔
—
✔
M Manual
✔
✔
✔
G Repeating flash
✔
—
—
REAR Rear-curtain sync 2
✔
✔
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A
(non-TTL auto flash).
2 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
Flash unit
D Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
FV lock is available with optional flash units in TTL and (where
supported) monitor pre-flash qA and monitor pre-flash A flash control
modes (see the manual provided with the flash unit for more
information). Note that when Advanced Wireless Lighting is used to
control remote flash units, you will need to set the flash control mode
for the master or at least one remote group to TTL, qA, or A. The area
metered for FV lock is as follows:
Flash unit
Stand-alone flash unit
Used with other flash units
(Advanced Wireless Lighting)
Flash mode
i-TTL
qA
i-TTL
qA
A
Metered area
6-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure meter
Entire frame
Area metered by flash exposure meter
Technical Notes 411
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras. Note that this camera is not included in the “digital SLR”
category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 64 and
12800 (Z 7) or between 100 and 12800 (Z 6). At values over 12800, the
desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture
settings. If the flash-ready indicator (c) flashes for about three seconds
after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the flash
has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLScompatible flash units only).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test shot
and view the results in the camera display.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
64
3.5
100
4
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
200
400
800
1600
3200
5
5.6
7.1
8
10
6400
11
12800
13
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
AF-assist illumination is provided by the camera, not the flash unit; the
SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400
do, however, provide red-eye reduction.
Noise in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken with
an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached directly to
the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance between
the camera and the power pack.
412 Technical Notes
Other Accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
Power sources • EN-EL15b Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: Additional EN-EL15b
batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon
service representatives. EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries
can also be used, but note that you may not be able to
take as many pictures on a single charge (0 465).
• MH-25a Battery Charger: The MH-25a can be used to
recharge EN-EL15b batteries. MH-25 battery chargers
can also be used.
• EH-7P Charging AC Adapter: The EH-7P can be used to charge
EN-EL15b batteries inserted in the camera (the battery
only charges when the camera is off ). It cannot be used
to charge EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries.
• EP-5B Power Connector, EH-5c and EH-5b AC Adapters: These
accessories can be used to power the camera for
extended periods. The EP-5B is required to connect the
camera to the EH-5c/EH-5b; see “Attaching a Power
Connector and AC Adapter” (0 418) for details.
Filters
• Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, avoid using filters when the
subject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright
light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended if matrix
metering fails to produce the desired results for filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8,
ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual
for details.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the in-focus indicator (I).
Mount
FTZ Mount Adapter (0 455)
adapters
Technical Notes 413
Remote cords MC-DC2 Remote Cord (length 1 m/3 ft 4 in.): When connected
to the camera accessory terminal, the MC-DC2 can be
used to release the shutter remotely.
GPS units
GP-1/GP-1A GPS Unit: When connected to the camera
accessory terminal, existing GP-1/GP-1A units can be
used to record the current latitude, longitude, altitude,
and UTC (Universal Coordinated Time) with pictures
taken with the camera. Note that production of GP-1/
GP-1A units has ended.
USB cables
• UC-E24 USB cable: A USB cable with a type C connector for
connection to the camera and a type A connector for
connection to the USB device.
• UC-E25 USB cable: A USB cable with two type C connectors.
HDMI cables HC-E1 HDMI Cable: An HDMI cable with a type C connector
for connection to the camera and a type A connector for
connection to HDMI devices.
Hot shoe
AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter: Mount the AS-15 on the camera
adapters
hot shoe to connect studio strobe lights or other flash
equipment via a sync terminal.
Accessory shoe BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover: A cover protecting the accessory
covers
shoe when no flash unit is attached.
Body caps
BF-N1 Body Cap: The body cap prevents dust entering the
camera when a lens is not in place.
Wireless
WT-7 Wireless Transmitter: Use the WT-7 to upload pictures
transmitters over a wireless network, to control the camera from a
computer running Camera Control Pro 2 (available
separately), or to take and browse pictures remotely from
a computer or smart device.
Note: A wireless network and some basic network knowledge is required
when using a wireless transmitter. Be sure to update the wireless transmitter
software to the latest version.
414 Technical Notes
Wireless
remote
controllers
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
• WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller/WR-T10 Wireless Remote
Controller: When a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is
attached to the accessory terminal, the camera can be
controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10 wireless remote
controller (when connecting the WR-R10, be sure the
cover for the accessory terminal and the USB and HDMI
connectors is fully open). The WR-R10 can also be used
to control radio-controlled flash units. For synchronized
release involving more than one camera, ready multiple
cameras with paired WR-R10 units attached.
• WR-1 Wireless Remote Controller: WR-1 units are used with
WR-R10 or WR-T10 wireless remote controllers or with
other WR-1 remote controllers, with the WR-1 units
functioning as either transmitters or receivers. As a
transmitter, the WR-1 can be used to control the camera
and take pictures via signals transmitted to a receiver (a
WR-R10 or a second WR-1) connected to the camera
accessory terminal, while as a receiver it receives remote
commands from a WR-T10 or a separate WR-1
transmitter.
Note: Be sure the firmware for the WR-R10 and WR-1 has been updated to
the latest version (WR-R10 firmware version 3.0 or later and WR-1 firmware
version 1.0.1 or later). For information on firmware updates, see the Nikon
website for your area. Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative
when updating the firmware for the WR-R10 from versions prior to version 2.0
to version 3.0 or later.
DK-29 Rubber Eyecup: The DK-29 makes the image in the
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
Technical Notes 415
Microphones
Software
• ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera
microphone jack to record stereo sound and reduce the
chance of picking up equipment noise (such as the
sounds produced by the lens during autofocus).
• ME-W1 Wireless Microphone: Use this wireless Bluetooth
microphone for off-camera recording.
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer and save photographs directly to the
computer hard disk. When Camera Control Pro 2 is used
to capture photographs directly to the computer, a PC
connection indicator (PC) will appear in the control panel.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the Nikon website for
your region for the latest information on supported operating systems. At
default settings, Nikon Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to
Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to an account on the
computer and the computer is connected to the Internet. A message is
automatically displayed when an update is found.
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest
information.
D Attaching and Removing the Accessory Shoe Cover
The BS-1 accessory shoe cover slides into the accessory shoe as shown.
To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly, press the cover down with
a thumb and slide it in the direction shown.
416 Technical Notes
D The HDMI/USB Cable Clip
To prevent accidental disconnection, attach the supplied clip to HDMI
cables or to the supplied USB cable as shown (the illustration shows
the USB cable; note that the clip may not fit all third-party HDMI
cables). Keep the monitor in the storage position when using the
cable clip.
HDMI cable goes
here
HDMI cable goes
here
USB cable
HDMI cable goes
here
Insert tab into
matching slot on
camera and attach
cable clip
HDMI cable and USB
cable used
simultaneously
Technical Notes 417
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power
connector and AC adapter.
1 Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber
(q) and power connector
(w) covers.
2 Insert the EP-5B power connector.
Be sure to insert the connector in the
orientation shown, using the
connector to keep the orange battery
latch pressed to one side. The latch
locks the connector in place when the
connector is fully inserted.
3 Close the batterychamber cover.
Position the power
connector cable so that it
passes through the power
connector slot and close
the battery-chamber cover.
418 Technical Notes
4 Connect the EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on the
AC adapter (e) and the power cable to the DC socket (r). A
P icon is displayed when the camera is powered by the AC
adapter and power connector.
Technical Notes 419
Caring for the Camera
Learn how to store, clean, and care for your camera.
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%,
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios, or
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
• Camera body: Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe
gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the
beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important:
Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause
damage not covered under warranty.
• Lenses, viewfinder: Glass surfaces are easily damaged. Remove
dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the
can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
• Monitor: Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this
could result in damage or malfunction.
420 Technical Notes
Image Sensor Cleaning
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing
in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu. The sensor can be cleaned at
any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be
performed automatically when the camera is turned off. If image
sensor cleaning fails to resolve the problem, contact a Nikonauthorized service representative.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
Holding the camera base down, select
Clean image sensor in the setup menu,
then highlight Clean now and press J.
The camera will check and clean the
image sensor. No other operations can
be performed until cleaning is complete;
do not remove or disconnect the power
source until cleaning ends and the setup
menu is displayed.
Technical Notes 421
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during shutdown interrupts image sensor
cleaning.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the
camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a
short wait.
422 Technical Notes
❚❚ “Automatic Cleaning”
Choose from the following options:
6 Clean at
shutdown
Cleaning off
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
during shutdown each time the camera is turned
off.
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
1 Select Automatic Cleaning.
Display the Clean image sensor
menu as described in “Clean Now”
(0 421). Highlight Automatic
Cleaning and press 2.
2 Select an option.
Highlight an option and press J.
Technical Notes 423
Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter cannot be removed from the image sensor
using image sensor cleaning, the sensor can be cleaned
manually as described below. Note, however, that the sensor is
extremely delicate and easily damaged; we recommend that
manual cleaning be performed only by a Nikon-authorized
service representative.
1 Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens or body cap.
2 Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls
on the image sensor, examine the
sensor for dust or lint. If no foreign
objects are present, proceed to Step 4.
3 Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the
sensor with a blower. Do not use a
blower-brush, as the bristles could
damage the sensor. Dirt that cannot
be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe
the sensor.
4 Replace the lens or body cap.
424 Technical Notes
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are
removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine
particles from the camera itself ) may adhere to the image sensor,
where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the
body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all
dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera
mount, lens mount, and body cap. Avoid attaching the body cap or
exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the
image sensor cleaning option as described in “Image Sensor
Cleaning”(0 421). If the problem persists, clean the sensor manually
(0 424) or have the sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service
personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on
the sensor can be retouched using the clean image options available in
some imaging applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
Technical Notes 425
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation,
place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to
sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation
or magnetic fields. Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the display,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the
sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect
in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or
while images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in
these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while an
AC adapter is connected.
426 Technical Notes
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon
return to normal.
Lenses, viewfinders, and other glass elements are easily damaged. Dust
and lint should be gently removed with a blower. When using an aerosol
blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains from glass surfaces, apply a small amount
of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the glass carefully.
Do not touch the image sensor: Under no
circumstances should you exert pressure on
the image sensor, poke it with cleaning tools,
or subject it to powerful air currents from a
blower. These actions could scratch or
otherwise damage the sensor. For
information on cleaning the image sensor, see
“Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 421).
Image sensor
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean and be careful not to touch
them with your fingers or with tools or other objects.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once
a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
Technical Notes 427
Notes on the monitor and viewfinder: These displays are constructed with
extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no
more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these displays
may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or
always off (black), this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images
recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light. Do not
apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction. Dust or lint can be removed with a blower. Stains can be
removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Should
the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken
glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or
entering the eyes and mouth.
Should you feel unwell or experience any of the following symptoms
while framing shots in the viewfinder, discontinue use until your
condition improves: nausea, eye pain, eye fatigue, dizziness, headache,
stiffness in your neck or shoulders, carsickness, or loss of hand-eye
coordination. The same applies should you start to feel unwell when
watching the shooting display flicker rapidly on and off during burst
photography.
Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that
include bright lights or back-lit subjects.
The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly
handled. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries
and chargers:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• The battery may become hot while in use. Observe caution when
handling the battery immediately after use.
428 Technical Notes
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point
that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the
camera for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with
an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or
extremely cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six
months.
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is
elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
• Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C to 35 °C
(41 °F to 95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution
could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be
reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C
(32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F). The
battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above
60 °C (140 °F).
• If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem
persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your
retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
• Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging
again.
Technical Notes 429
• Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low
temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at
which it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature below
5 °C (41 °F), the battery life indicator in the Battery info display may
show a temporary decrease.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL15b battery.
• The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the
MH-25a only. Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug
when not in use.
• Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important
occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending
on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries
on short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of batteries tends
to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking
photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm
place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery
may recover some of its charge.
• Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being
sure to first insulate the terminals with tape.
The charging AC adapter: Observe the precautions below when using the
charging AC adapter.
• Do not move the camera during charging. Failure to observe this
precaution could in very rare instances result in the camera showing
that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged.
Disconnect and reconnect the adapter to begin charging again.
• Do not short the adapter terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the adapter.
• Unplug the adapter when it is not in use.
430 Technical Notes
Specifications
Nikon Z 7/Z 6 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Lens mount
Lens
Compatible lenses
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
Dust-Reduction System
Storage
Image size (pixels)
Digital camera with support for
interchangeable lenses
Nikon Z mount
• Z mount NIKKOR lenses
• F mount NIKKOR lenses with mount adapter;
restrictions may apply
• Z 7: 45.7 million
• Z 6: 24.5 million
35.9 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon FX format)
• Z 7: 46.89 million
• Z 6: 25.28 million
Image Dust Off reference data (requires
Capture NX-D); image sensor cleaning
• Z 7:
- FX (36×24) image area
8256 × 5504 (Large: 45.4 M)
6192 × 4128 (Medium: 25.6 M)
4128 × 2752 (Small: 11.4 M)
- DX (24×16) image area
5408 × 3600 (Large: 19.5 M)
4048 × 2696 (Medium: 10.9 M)
2704 × 1800 (Small: 4.9 M)
- 5 : 4 (30×24) image area
6880 × 5504 (Large: 37.9 M)
5152 × 4120 (Medium: 21.2 M)
3440 × 2752 (Small: 9.5 M)
Technical Notes 431
Storage
Image size (pixels)
432 Technical Notes
- 1 : 1 (24×24) image area
5504 × 5504 (Large: 30.3 M)
4128 × 4128 (Medium: 17.0 M)
2752 × 2752 (Small: 7.6 M)
- 16 : 9 (36×20) image area
8256 × 4640 (Large: 38.3 M)
6192 × 3480 (Medium: 21.5 M)
4128 × 2320 (Small: 9.6 M)
- Photographs taken during movie recording at a frame
size of 3840 × 2160: 3840 × 2160
- Photographs taken during movie recording at other
frame sizes: 1920 × 1080
• Z 6:
- FX (36×24) image area
6048 × 4024 (Large: 24.3 M)
4528 × 3016 (Medium: 13.7 M)
3024 × 2016 (Small: 6.1 M)
- DX (24×16) image area
3936 × 2624 (Large: 10.3 M)
2944 × 1968 (Medium: 5.8 M)
1968 × 1312 (Small: 2.6 M)
- 1 : 1 (24×24) image area
4016 × 4016 (Large: 16.1 M)
3008 × 3008 (Medium: 9.0 M)
2000 × 2000 (Small: 4.0 M)
- 16 : 9 (36×20) image area
6048 × 3400 (Large: 20.6 M)
4528 × 2544 (Medium: 11.5 M)
3024 × 1696 (Small: 5.1 M)
- Photographs taken during movie recording at a frame
size of 3840 × 2160: 3840 × 2160
- Photographs taken during movie recording at other
frame sizes: 1920 × 1080
Storage
File format
Picture Control System
Media
File system
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Frame coverage
Magnification
Eyepoint
Diopter adjustment
Eye sensor
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit (lossless compressed,
compressed, or uncompressed); large,
medium, and small available (medium and
small images are recorded at a bit depth of
12 bits using lossless compression)
• TIFF (RGB)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine
(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression; optimal quality
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome,
Portrait, Landscape, Flat, Creative Picture
Controls (Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday,
Somber, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached,
Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red,
Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon);
selected Picture Control can be modified;
storage for custom Picture Controls
XQD memory cards
DCF 2.0, Exif 2.31, PictBridge
1.27-cm/0.5-in. approx. 3690k-dot (Quad VGA)
OLED electronic viewfinder with color balance
and auto and 11-level manual brightness
controls
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
Approx. 0.8× (50 mm lens at infinity, −1.0 m −1)
21 mm (−1.0 m −1; from center surface of
viewfinder eyepiece lens)
−4 – +2 m −1
Automatically switches between monitor and
viewfinder displays
Technical Notes 433
Monitor
Monitor
Shutter
Type
Speed
Flash sync speed
Release
Release mode
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 2100k-dot tilting TFT
touch-sensitive LCD with 170° viewing angle,
approximately 100% frame coverage, and color
balance and 11-level manual brightness controls
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focalplane mechanical shutter; electronic frontcurtain shutter; electronic shutter
1/8000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV, bulb, time,
X200
X= 1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or
slower; Auto FP High-Speed sync supported
Single frame, low-speed continuous, highspeed continuous, high-speed continuous
(extended), self-timer
Approximate maximum • Z 7:
frame advance rate
- Low-speed continuous: 1–5 fps
(measured under Nikon- High-speed continuous: 5.5 fps (14-bit NEF/RAW:
specified test conditions)
5 fps)
- High-speed continuous (extended): 9 fps (14-bit
NEF/RAW: 8 fps)
• Z 6:
- Low-speed continuous: 1–5 fps
- High-speed continuous: 5.5 fps
- High-speed continuous (extended): 12 fps (14-bit
NEF/RAW: 9 fps)
Self-timer
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of
0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s
434 Technical Notes
Exposure
Metering system
Metering mode
TTL metering using camera image sensor
• Matrix metering
• Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given
to 12 mm circle in center of frame; weighting
can instead be based on average of entire
frame
• Spot metering: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5%
of frame) centered on selected focus point
• Highlight-weighted metering
Range (ISO 100, f/2.0 lens, • Z 7: –3 – +17 EV
20 °C/68 °F)
• Z 6: –4 – +17 EV
Mode
Auto (b); programmed auto with flexible
program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperturepriority auto (A); manual (M); user settings (U1,
U2, U3)
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV available
in modes P, S, A, and M
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity
• Z 7: ISO 64 – 25600 in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV. Can
(Recommended Exposure also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO
Index)
32 equivalent) below ISO 64 or to approx. 0.3,
0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 102400 equivalent)
above ISO 25600; auto ISO sensitivity control
available
• Z 6: ISO 100 – 51200 in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV. Can
also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO
50 equivalent) below ISO 100 or to approx. 0.3,
0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 204800 equivalent)
above ISO 51200; auto ISO sensitivity control
available
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High,
Normal, Low, or Off
Multiple exposure
Add, average, lighten, darken
Other options
HDR (high dynamic range), photo mode flicker
reduction
Technical Notes 435
Focus
Autofocus
Hybrid phase-detection/contrast AF with AF
assist
Detection range (single- • Z 7: −2 – +19 EV (with low-light AF: −4 –
servo AF, photo shooting
+19 EV)
mode, ISO 100, f/2.0 lens, • Z 6: −3.5 – +19 EV (with low-light AF: −6 –
20 °C/68 °F)
+19 EV)
Lens servo
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S);
continuous-servo AF (AF-C); full-time AF (AF-F;
available only in movie mode); predictive
focus tracking
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be
used
Focus points
• Z 7: 493
(single-point AF, photo
• Z 6: 273
shooting mode, FX image
area)
AF-area mode
Pinpoint, single-point, and dynamic-area AF
(pinpoint and dynamic-area AF available in
photo mode only); wide-area AF (S); wide-area
AF (L); auto-area AF
Focus lock
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing
center of sub-selector
Vibration reduction (VR)
Camera VR
Lens VR
Flash
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
436 Technical Notes
5-axis image sensor shift
Lens shift (available with VR lenses)
TTL: i-TTL flash control; i-TTL balanced fill-flash is
used with matrix, center-weighted, and
highlight-weighted metering, standard i-TTL
fill-flash with spot metering
Front-curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync,
red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction with slow
sync, off
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV available
in modes P, S, A, and M
Flash
Flash-ready indicator
Accessory shoe
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
White balance
White balance
Bracketing
Bracketing types
Movie
Metering system
Metering mode
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged;
flashes as underexposure warning after flash is
fired at full output
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts
and safety lock
i-TTL flash control, radio-controlled Advanced
Wireless Lighting, optical Advanced Wireless
Lighting, modeling illumination, FV lock, Color
Information Communication, Auto FP HighSpeed Sync, unified flash control
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct
sunlight, cloudy, shade, incandescent,
fluorescent (7 types), flash, choose color
temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), preset manual
(up to 6 values can be stored), all except choose
color temperature with fine-tuning
Exposure, flash, white balance, and ADL
TTL metering using camera image sensor
Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
• 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p (progressive), 25p,
24p
• 1920 × 1080; 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
• 1920×1080 (slow-motion); 30p ×4, 25p ×4,
24p ×5
Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p,
25p, and 24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97,
25, and 23.976 fps respectively; quality
selection available at all sizes except
3840 × 2160, 1920 × 1080 120p/100p, and
1920 × 1080 slow-motion, when quality is fixed
at m (high)
Technical Notes 437
Movie
File format
Video compression
Audio recording format
Audio recording device
MOV, MP4
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Linear PCM, AAC
Built-in stereo or external microphone with
attenuator option; sensitivity adjustable
Exposure compensation –3 – +3 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV available
in modes P, S, A, and M
ISO sensitivity
• Z 7:
(Recommended Exposure - b: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 64 to
Index)
25600)
- P, S, A: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 64
to Hi 2) with selectable upper limit
- M: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 64 to Hi 2)
available with selectable upper limit; manual
selection (ISO 64 to 25600 in steps of 1/3 or 1/2
EV) with additional options available
equivalent to approximately 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, or
2 EV (ISO 102400 equivalent) above
ISO 25600
• Z 6:
- b: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to
51200)
- P, S, A: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to
Hi 2) with selectable upper limit
- M: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to
Hi 2) available with selectable upper limit;
manual selection (ISO 100 to 51200 in steps
of 1/3 or 1/2 EV) with additional options
available equivalent to approximately 0.3,
0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 204800 equivalent)
above ISO 51200
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Same as photo settings,
Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off
Other options
Time-lapse movies, electronic vibration
reduction, time codes, movie log output (N-Log)
438 Technical Notes
Playback
Playback
Interface
USB
HDMI output
Accessory terminal
Audio input
Audio output
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images)
playback with playback zoom, playback zoom
cropping, movie playback, photo and/or movie
slide shows, histogram display, highlights,
photo information, location data display,
picture rating, and auto image rotation
Type C connector (SuperSpeed USB); connection
to built-in USB port is recommended
Type C HDMI connector
Can be used with MC-DC2 and other optional
accessories
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in
power supported)
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter)
• Standards:
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (Europe, U.S.A., Canada,
Mexico)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the
Americas)
• Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5825 MHz (U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5805 MHz (other countries in the Americas)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5745–
5805 MHz (Georgia)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5320 MHz (other European countries)
• Maximum output power (EIRP):
- Z 7: 2.4 GHz band: 7.0 dBm
5 GHz band: 9.1 dBm (Georgia)
5 GHz band: 12.1 dBm (other countries)
- Z 6: 2.4 GHz band: 7.4 dBm
5 GHz band: 9.2 dBm (Georgia)
5 GHz band: 12.2 dBm (other countries)
• Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
Technical Notes 439
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Range (line of sight)
Power source
Battery
Charging AC adapter
AC adapter
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
440 Technical Notes
• Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification
Version 4.2
• Operating frequency:
Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
• Maximum output power (EIRP):
- Z 7: Bluetooth: 1.5 dBm
Bluetooth Low Energy: 0 dBm
- Z 6: Bluetooth: 1.9 dBm
Bluetooth Low Energy: 0.4 dBm
Approximately 10 m (32 ft) without
interference; range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles
One EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion battery
(0 465); EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 can also be used,
but note that you may not be able to take as
many pictures on a single charge and that
charging AC adapter can be used to charge
EN-EL15b batteries only
EH-7P charging AC adapter (supplied with the
Z 7 only)
EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter (requires EP-5B power
connector, which is available separately)
/ in. (ISO 1222)
14
Approx. 134 × 100.5 × 67.5 mm (5.3 × 4 × 2.7 in.)
Approx. 675 g (1 lb. 7.9 oz.) with battery and
memory card but without body cap;
approx. 585 g/1 lb. 4.7 oz. (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature
Humidity
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
85% or less (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and illustrations in the manuals
are for expository purposes only.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
❚❚ MH-25a Battery Charger
Rated input
Rated output
Supported batteries
Charging time
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Length of power cable
Weight
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A
DC 8.4 V/1.2 A
Nikon EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge
remains
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 95 × 33.5 × 71 mm (3.7 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.),
excluding projections
Approx. 1.5 m (4.9 ft), if supplied
Approx. 115 g (4.1 oz), excluding supplied
power connector (power cable or AC wall
adapter)
The symbols on this product represent the following:
m AC, p DC, q Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
Technical Notes 441
❚❚ EH-7P Charging AC Adapter (Supplied with the Z 7 Only)
Rated input
Rated output
Supported batteries
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, MAX 0.5 A
DC 5.0 V/3.0 A
Nikon EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion batteries
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 65.5 × 26.5 × 58.5 mm (2.6 × 1.1 ×
2.4 in.), excluding plug adapter
Approx. 125 g (4.5 oz), excluding plug adapter
The EH-7P comes with a plug adapter attached in countries or regions where required; the shape
of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale. Do not attempt to remove the plug adapter, as
this could damage the product.
The symbols on this product represent the following:
m AC, p DC, q Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
❚❚ EN-EL15b Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Type
Rated capacity
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.0 V/1900 mAh
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)
Approx. 80 g (2.9 oz), excluding terminal cover
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
442 Technical Notes
A Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other
data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data.
Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage
devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such
data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to
another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or
format the device and then completely refill it with images containing
no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should
be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage
devices.
Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another
person, you should also use the Reset all settings option in the camera
setup menu to delete network settings and other personal information.
A Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• Exif version 2.31: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMIcompliant devices via a single cable connection.
Technical Notes 443
A Trademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license. Windows
is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries. Mac, macOS, OS X, Apple®,
App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, and iPod touch® are
trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google
LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or modified from work created and
shared by Google and used according to terms described in the Creative
Commons 3.0 Attribution License. PictBridge is a trademark of the
Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). XQD is a trademark of
Sony Corporation. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing,
LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Nikon Corporation is under license.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in the
badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may
affect wireless performance.
444 Technical Notes
A FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(https://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project
(https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights
reserved.
A AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC
VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO
PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER
USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
http://www.mpegla.com
Technical Notes 445
NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s
Manual
This section is included as a lens manual for purchasers of the
NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S lens kit. Note that lens kits may not be
available in some countries or regions.
Using the Lens
❚❚ Parts of the Lens: Names and Functions
1
2
4
5
6
7 8
9
12
3
13
14
446 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual
10 11
1 Lens hood
Lens hoods block stray light that would
otherwise cause flare or ghosting. They also
serve to protect the lens.
2 Lens hood lock mark
3 Lens hood alignment Use when attaching the lens hood.
mark
4 Lens hood mounting
Use when attaching the lens hood.
mark
Rotate to zoom in or out. Be sure to extend the
5 Zoom ring
lens before use.
6 Focal length scale
Determine the approximate focal length when
zooming the lens in or out.
7 Focal length mark
• Autofocus mode selected: In autofocus mode, you
can rotate this customizable ring to perform a
8 Control ring
function selected with the camera.
• Manual focus mode selected: Rotate to focus.
9 Lens mounting mark Use when mounting the lens on the camera.
10 Rubber lens-mount
—
gasket
11 CPU contacts
Used to transfer data to and from the camera.
Choose A for autofocus, M for manual focus. Note
that regardless of the setting chosen, focus must
12 Focus-mode switch
be adjusted manually when manual focus mode
is selected using camera controls.
13 Front lens cap
—
14 Rear lens cap
—
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual 447
❚❚ Attachment and Removal
Attaching the Lens
1 Turn the camera off, remove the body cap, and detach the
rear lens cap.
2 Position the lens on the camera body, keeping the
mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting
mark on the camera body, and then rotate the lens
counterclockwise until it clicks into place.
Removing the Lens
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Press and hold the lens release button while turning the
lens clockwise.
448 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ Before Use
The lens is retractable and must be extended before use. Rotate
the zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into the extended
position. Pictures can only be taken when the focal length mark
points to positions between 24 and 70 on the focal length scale.
Pictures can be taken
at these focal lengths
To retract the lens, rotate the zoom ring in the opposite
direction, stopping when you reach the (I) position on the focal
length scale.
If the camera is turned on with the lens retracted, a warning will
be displayed. Extend the lens before use.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual 449
❚❚ Attaching and Removing the Lens Hood
Align the lens hood mounting mark (I) with the lens hood
alignment mark (I) and then rotate the hood (w) until the I
mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (K).
To remove the hood, reverse the above steps.
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the I
symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly. The hood
can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
❚❚ When the Lens Is Attached
The focus position may change if you turn the camera off and
then on again after focusing. Refocus before shooting. If you
have focused on a pre-selected location while waiting for your
subject to appear, we recommend that you do not turn the
camera off until the picture is taken.
450 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual
Precautions for Use
• Do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the lens
hood.
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Should the rubber lens-mount gasket be damaged, cease use
immediately and take the lens to a Nikon-authorized service
center for repair.
• Replace the front and rear lens caps when the lens is not in use.
• To protect the interior of the lens, store it out of direct sunlight.
• Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
• Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or
warp parts made from reinforced plastic.
• Rapid changes in temperature may cause damaging
condensation inside and outside the lens. Before taking the
lens from a warm to a cold environment or vice versa, place it in
its case or a plastic bag to slow the change in temperature.
• We recommend that you place the lens in its case to protect it
from scratches during transport.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual 451
Lens Care
• Removing dust is normally sufficient to clean the glass surfaces
of the lens.
• Smudges and fingerprints can be removed from fluorinecoated lens elements using a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens
cleaning tissue; clean from the center outwards using a circular
motion. To remove stubborn stains, wipe gently using a soft
cloth lightly dampened with a small amount of distilled water,
ethanol, or lens cleaner. Any drop-shaped marks left from this
process on the water- and oil-repellent surface can
subsequently be removed with a dry cloth.
• When cleaning lens elements that are not fluorine-coated,
remove smudges and fingerprints using a soft, clean cotton
cloth or lens cleaning tissue lightly dampened with a small
amount of ethanol or lens cleaner. Wipe gently from the center
outwards in a circular motion, taking care not to leave smears
or touch the lens with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to
clean the lens.
• Neutral Color (NC) filters (available separately) and the like can
be used to protect the front lens element.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a
cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in
direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
452 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual
Accessories
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• LC-72B 72 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap
• LF-N1 Rear Lens Cap
• HB-85 Bayonet Hood
• CL-C1 Lens Case
D Using the Lens Case
• The case is intended to protect the lens from scratches, not from falls
or other physical shocks.
• The case is not water resistant.
• The material used in the case may fade, bleed, shrink, or change color
when rubbed or wet.
• Remove dust with a soft brush.
• Water and stains can be removed from the surface with a soft, dry
cloth. Do not use alcohol, benzene, thinner, or other volatile
chemicals.
• Do not store in locations exposed to direct sunlight or high
temperatures or humidity.
• Do not use the case to clean the monitor or lens elements.
• Be careful that the lens does not fall from the case during transport.
Material: Polyester
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
72 mm screw-on filters
D Filters
Use only one filter at a time. Remove the lens hood before attaching
filters or rotating circular polarizing filters.
Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual 453
Specifications
Mount
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Focusing system
Minimum focus distance
Diaphragm blades
Aperture range
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
Weight
Nikon Z mount
24 – 70 mm
f/4
14 elements in 11 groups (including 1 ED lens
element, 1 aspherical ED element, 3 aspherical
elements, elements with Nano Crystal Coat, and
a fluorine-coated front lens element)
• FX format: 84° – 34° 20´
• DX format: 61° – 22° 50´
Graduated in millimeters (24, 28, 35, 50, 70)
Internal focusing system
0.3 m (0.99 ft) from focal plane at all zoom
positions
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
f/4 – 22
72 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Approx. 77.5 mm maximum diameter ×
88.5 mm (distance from camera lens mount
flange when lens is retracted)
Approx. 500 g (1 lb 1.7 oz)
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance, specifications, and performance of this product
at any time and without prior notice.
454 Technical Notes ➜ NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S Lens User’s Manual
FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual
This mount adapter allows Nikon F mount NIKKOR lenses to be
mounted on Nikon Z mount mirrorless cameras. It cannot be
mounted on F mount (Nikon digital SLR) or 1 mount cameras
(Nikon 1 advanced cameras with interchangeable lenses) or
used with 1 NIKKOR lenses. This section is included as a mountadapter manual for purchasers of the mount-adapter kit. Note
that mount-adapter kits may not be available in some countries
or regions.
Note that depending on the lens, the adapter may limit
autofocus or other camera features.
A Compatible F Mount Lenses
For information on lenses that can be mounted on the FTZ mount
adapter for use with Z mount cameras, see Compatible F Mount Lenses,
available from the Nikon Download Center:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/491/FTZ.html
Technical Notes ➜ FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual 455
The Mount Adapter
❚❚ Parts of the Adapter
Lens mount
Camera mount
2
3
6
7
4
8
1
5
1
2
3
4
5
Nikon F mount (attaches to lens)
Lens signal contacts
Lens mounting mark
Lens release
Tripod socket
6 Adapter mounting mark
7 Nikon Z mount (attaches to
camera)
8 CPU contacts
456 Technical Notes ➜ FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual
❚❚ Attachment and Removal
Turn the camera off before attaching the adapter to or removing
it from the camera or attaching lenses to or removing lenses
from the adapter. Choose a location out of direct sunlight and be
careful to prevent dust from entering the devices. While
attaching lenses, avoid pressing the camera or adapter lens
release.
Attaching the Adapter and Lens
1 Remove the body and rear lens caps from the adapter and
the body cap from the camera.
2 Attach the adapter to
the camera.
Keeping the adapter
mounting mark aligned
with the mounting
mark on the camera
body (q), position the adapter on the camera and then
rotate it counterclockwise until it clicks into place (w).
3 Remove the rear lens cap.
Technical Notes ➜ FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual 457
4 Attach the lens to the
adapter.
Keeping the lens
mounting mark aligned
with the lens mounting
mark on the adapter
(e), position the lens
on the adapter and
then rotate it
counterclockwise until
it clicks into place (r).
Detaching the Lens and Adapter
1 Detach the lens.
Press and hold the
adapter lens release
(q) while turning the
lens clockwise (w).
Attach the front and
rear caps to the lens
after removal.
2 Detach the adapter.
Press and hold the camera lens
release button (e) while
turning the adapter clockwise
(r). After removing the
adapter, attach the body and
rear caps to the adapter and the body cap to the camera.
458 Technical Notes ➜ FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
Select minimum aperture (the highest f/-number) before attaching
CPU lenses equipped with aperture rings.
D Incompatible Lenses and Accessories
The following lenses and accessories cannot be used. Attempting to
forcibly attach any of this equipment could damage the adapter or the
lens. Individual variation may render lenses other than those listed
below incompatible; do not use force if you encounter resistance when
attempting to attach a lens.
• Non-AI lenses
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers
• IX-NIKKOR
851001–906200)
• TC-16A AF Teleconverter
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Lenses that require the AU-1
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
focusing unit (400mm f/4.5,
• NIKKOR-H Auto 2.8cm f/3.5
600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,
(28mm f/3.5) lenses with serial
1200mm f/11)
numbers below 362000
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, • NIKKOR-S Auto 3.5cm f/2.8
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
(35mm f/2.8) lenses with serial
• 2.1cm f/4
numbers below 928000
• K2 Extension Ring
• NIKKOR-S Auto 5cm f/2 (50mm
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial
f/2)
numbers 174041–174180)
• NIKKOR-Q Auto 13.5cm f/3.5
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial
(135mm f/3.5) lenses with serial
numbers 174031–174127)
numbers below 753000
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial
• Micro-NIKKOR 5.5cm f/3.5
numbers 280001–300490)
• Medical-NIKKOR Auto 200mm
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/5.6
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, TC-16 • Auto NIKKOR Telephoto-Zoom
AF Teleconverter)
85–250mm f/4–4.5
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number
• Auto NIKKOR Telephoto-Zoom
180900 or earlier)
200–600mm f/9.5–10.5
Technical Notes ➜ FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual 459
Using the Mount Adapter
• Autofocus may not function as expected when the adapter is
used with an F mount NIKKOR lens. If the camera has trouble
focusing, set the AF-area mode to single point and select the
center focus area, or focus manually.
• With some lenses, the camera vibration reduction feature may
not function as expected or may cause vignetting or a drop in
peripheral illumination.
Precautions for Use
• When using the adapter with lenses weighing over 1300 g (2 lb
13.9 oz), support the lens when holding the camera and do not
use the camera strap. Failure to observe these precautions
could damage the camera lens mount.
• When using telephoto lenses equipped with a tripod collar,
attach the tripod to the lens tripod collar rather than to the
adapter tripod socket.
• Keep the CPU and lens signal contacts clean.
• Keep the adapter dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can
cause irreparable damage.
• Leaving the adapter in extremely hot locations could damage
or warp parts made from reinforced plastic.
460 Technical Notes ➜ FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual
Caring for the Adapter
• Do not touch the interior of the mount adapter. Use a blower or
soft brush to remove dust, being careful not to rub or scratch
the inside of the adapter.
• When cleaning the adapter, use a blower to remove dust and
lint and then wipe the adapter gently with a soft, dry cloth.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to
clean the adapter.
• If the adapter will not be used for an extended period, store it
in a cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in
direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
Accessories
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• BF-1B Body Cap
• LF-N1 Rear Lens Cap
Specifications
Type
Supported cameras
Dimensions
Weight
Mount adapter
Nikon Z mount mirrorless cameras
Approx. 70 mm diameter (excluding
projections) × 80 mm
Approx. 135 g (4.8 oz)
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance, specifications, and performance of this product
at any time and without prior notice.
Technical Notes ➜ FTZ Mount Adapter User’s Manual 461
Approved Memory Cards
The camera can be used with XQD memory cards. Cards with
write speeds of 45 MB/s (300×) or better are recommended for
movie recording; slower speeds may interrupt recording or
playback or result in playback that is jerky and uneven. For
information on compatibility and operation, contact the
manufacturer.
462 Technical Notes
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 64 GB Sony G-series QD-G64E XQD card
at different image quality and size settings when FX (36 × 24) is
selected for Choose image area (as of July 2018).
Z 7:
Image quality
NEF (RAW)
Lossless
compressed
Compressed
Uncompressed
TIFF (RGB)
Fine
JPEG 3
Normal
Basic
Image size
Large
12-bit Medium
Small
14-bit
12-bit
Large
14-bit
12-bit
14-bit
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
File size 1
44.7 MB
31.5 MB
24.5 MB
55.8 MB
40.7 MB
49.4 MB
74.1 MB
85.1 MB
134.6 MB
76.5 MB
34.8 MB
17.2 MB
11.7 MB
6.8 MB
11.8 MB
7.0 MB
3.5 MB
3.8 MB
2.6 MB
1.6 MB
No. of
images 1
748
1000
1400
654
1000
845
748
654
412
723
1500
1900
3200
6500
3700
6400
12,700
7500
12,300
24,100
Buffer
capacity 2
23
19
19
19
23
19
23
18
21
22
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
Technical Notes 463
Z 6:
No. of
Buffer
images 1
capacity 2
Image size File size 1
Large
22.5 MB
1300
35
12-bit Medium
16.1 MB
1900
26
Lossless
compressed
Small
12.7 MB
2500
26
14-bit
28.2 MB
1100
43
12-bit
20.4 MB
1800
37
Compressed
Large
14-bit
24.8 MB
1500
43
12-bit
38.5 MB
1300
33
Uncompressed
14-bit
44.1 MB
1100
34
Large
69.3 MB
759
27
TIFF (RGB)
Medium
39.5 MB
1300
31
Small
18.4 MB
2800
35
Large
9.4 MB
3400
44
Fine
Medium
6.6 MB
5600
50
Small
4.0 MB
10,400
51
Large
6.4 MB
6700
44
Normal
Medium
3.9 MB
10,900
50
Small
2.1 MB
19,900
51
Large
2.3 MB
13,000
46
Basic
Medium
1.7 MB
20,800
50
Small
1.2 MB
35,200
50
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. May drop in
some situations, for example at image qualities marked with a star (“m”) or if auto distortion
control is on.
3 Figures assume size-priority JPEG compression. Selecting an image-quality option marked with
a star (“m”; optimal compression) increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and
buffer capacity drop accordingly.
Image quality
NEF (RAW)
JPEG 3
464 Technical Notes
Battery Endurance
The approximate length of footage or number of shots that can be
recorded with a fully-charged EN-EL15b 1 battery varies with the monitor
mode. The figures for photographs 2 are as follows:
• Viewfinder only: 330 shots (Z 7), 310 shots (Z 6)
• Monitor only: 400 shots (Z 7), 380 shots (Z 6)
The figures for movies 3 are:
• Viewfinder only: 85 minutes
• Monitor only: 85 minutes
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance:
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features
• Using the camera with optional accessories connected
• Repeatedly zooming in and out
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL15b
batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery
performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
1 EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries can also be used, but note that you may not be able to take as
many pictures on a single charge. Endurance varies with the condition of the battery, the
temperature, the interval between shots, and the length of time menus are displayed.
2 CIPA standard. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/4 S lens
under the following test conditions: one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s.
3 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and a NIKKOR Z
24–70mm f/4 S lens under conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging Products
Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 29 minutes 59 seconds in length; recording
may end before these limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.
Technical Notes 465
Index
Symbols
b (Auto mode) .............................41, 45
P (Programmed auto) .................70, 71
S (Shutter-priority auto) .............70, 71
A (Aperture-priority auto)..........70, 72
M (Manual) ......................................70, 73
U1/U2/U3 ...........................................70, 75
U (Single frame) ...........................84, 87
V (Continuous L) ................... 84, 111
W (Continuous H)................... 84, 111
X (Continuous H (extended)) ...85,
111
E (Self-timer).................................85, 87
L (Silent photography) ....................67
x (Electronic front-curtain shutter) ..
262
P (Mechanical shutter).................. 262
3 (Pinpoint AF)...................................54
d (Single-point AF) ..........................54
e (Dynamic-area AF) .......................55
f (Wide-area AF (S))........................55
g (Wide-area AF (L)) ........................55
h (Auto-area AF) ...............................55
L (Matrix) ........................................... 108
M (Center-weighted)...................... 108
N (Spot)............................................... 108
t (Highlight-weighted) ............... 108
J (Red-eye reduction)....... 107, 354
L (Slow sync) ...................... 107, 354
M (Rear-curtain sync)........ 107, 355
E (Exposure compensation) ...........82
K button ..................................... 49, 122
O button .................................................51
G button............................................18
c (E) button .......................................84
S button .....................................80, 81
W (Q) button .................... 20, 122, 123
466 Technical Notes
X button .................................... 122, 139
i button .......................................... 21, 92
J button................................................ 18
I (In-focus indicator)........................ 61
c (Flash-ready indicator)................412
t icon..................................................... 40
Numerics
1 : 1 (24 × 24) ......................................106
16 : 9 (36 × 20)....................................106
5 : 4 (30 × 24) ......................................106
A
AC adapter ................................ 413, 418
Accessories..........................................413
Accessory terminal...........................439
Active D-Lighting..............................110
ADL bracketing..................................198
AE & flash bracketing ......................191
AE bracketing.....................................191
AE lock ............................................. 89, 90
AF ....................................................52, 251
AF activation.......................................254
AF fine-tune........................................299
AF lock ............................................. 89, 90
AF speed ..............................................290
AF tracking sensitivity.....................291
AF-area mode ...................................... 54
AF-assist ........................................43, 256
AF-C............................................................ 53
AF-C priority selection ....................251
AF-F...................................................53, 121
AF-ON button.......................................... 17
AF-S............................................................ 52
AF-S priority selection.....................251
After burst, show ..............................157
After delete .........................................156
Airplane mode...................................308
Aperture .................................................72
Aperture-priority auto.......................72
Apply settings to live view............ 264
Assign remote (WR) Fn button.... 308
Attaching the lens...............................36
Attenuator .......................................... 244
Auto (Set Picture Control) ................94
Auto (White balance)..................64, 98
Auto bracketing.......................190, 267
Auto c ISO sensitivity control ...... 266
Auto distortion control .........184, 242
Auto external flash..................352, 359
Auto FP high-speed sync............... 265
Auto ISO sensitivity control ... 81, 169
Auto-area AF .........................................55
Auto-area AF face/eye detection 252
Autoexposure lock.......................89, 90
Autofocus..................................... 52, 251
Automatic display switch................... 9
B
Battery..............................................28, 32
Battery charger .......................... 28, 441
Battery endurance ........................... 465
Battery info ......................................... 310
Battery level...........................................34
Beep options...................................... 305
Body cap....................................... 36, 414
Bracketing........................................... 267
Bracketing order............................... 268
Bulb ..........................................................78
C
Cable clip............................................. 417
Camera Control Pro 2 ..................... 416
Capture NX-D.............................. 68, 337
Center-weighted .....................108, 258
CHARGE lamp ....................................29, 30
Charging AC adapter .....29, 413, 430,
442
Charging the battery .........................28
Choose color temp. (White balance)
65, 100, 173
Choose image area................. 119, 165
Choose start/end point ..................135
CL mode shooting speed...............261
Clean image sensor................ 300, 421
Clock................................................. 38, 40
Clock battery ........................................ 40
Cloudy (White balance) ............. 64, 98
Color space..........................................182
Color temperature........... 65, 100, 173
Command dial ............................17, 281
Compatible lenses............................431
Conformity marking ........................309
Connect to PC .......................... 309, 337
Connect to smart device...... 308, 336
Continuous..................................... 84, 87
Continuous H ..............................84, 111
Continuous H (extended) .......85, 111
Continuous L ...............................84, 111
Continuous release mode84, 87, 111
Control panel................................. 5, 407
Control panel brightness ...............297
Control ring..................................61, 447
Copyright.............................................304
CPU contacts ......................................447
Creative Lighting System (CLS)....408
Creative Picture Control ................... 94
Crop .......................................................132
Custom control assignment .24, 271,
285
Custom Picture Control178, 179, 241
Custom Settings...................... 148, 247
Customize i menu ........ 22, 269, 284
D
Date and time .............................39, 295
Date format..................................40, 295
Daylight saving time.................39, 295
DCF.........................................................443
Default settings ....................... 143, 387
Technical Notes 467
Delete................................... 51, 140, 155
Delete all images.............................. 141
Delete current image............... 51, 140
Delete selected images.................. 141
Diffraction compensation.... 184, 242
Diopter adjustment control .............. 8
Direct sunlight (White balance) ....64,
98
DISP button.............................................15
Distance-priority manual .....352, 360
Distortion control............................. 324
D-Lighting........................................... 323
Download center ...................................ii
DX .......................................................... 106
DX format............................................ 119
Dynamic-area AF....................... 55, 113
E
Edit movie.................................. 135, 329
Electronic VR............................. 120, 243
Error messages.........................394, 396
EV steps for exposure cntrl ........... 257
Exif ......................................................... 443
Exposure....................................... 82, 257
Exposure compensation 82, 257, 266
Exposure data.................................... 125
Exposure delay mode..................... 261
Exposure indicator..............................74
Exposure lock ................................89, 90
Exposures remaining .........................34
Extensions........................................... 165
External microphone ............. 118, 416
Eye sensor................................................ 8
Eye-detection AF.................................57
F
Face-detection AF...............................57
File information ................................ 125
File naming................................165, 239
File number sequence.................... 263
Filter effects...........................................97
468 Technical Notes
Fine-tune optimal exposure .........258
Fine-tuning white balance .....99, 171
Firmware version ..............................313
Flash ...................................107, 349, 408
Flash (White balance)................. 64, 98
Flash bracketing................................191
Flash compensation .............. 189, 356
Flash control............................. 186, 352
Flash info ................................... 359, 384
Flash mode................................ 107, 354
Flash ready indicator .......................412
Flash shutter speed..........................266
Flash sync speed ..................... 265, 351
Flat (Set Picture Control).................. 94
Flexible program................................. 71
Flick.......................................................... 11
Flicker reduction ..................... 185, 242
Fluorescent (White balance).... 64, 98
Fn1 button.............................................. 24
Fn2 button.............................................. 24
Focal length........................................449
Focal length scale.............................449
Focal plane mark................................. 62
Focus indicator .................................... 61
Focus lock....................................... 89, 90
Focus mode .......................................... 52
Focus point ........................................... 89
Focus shift shooting ........................231
Focus tracking with lock-on..........252
Format memory card ......................294
Frame rate ....................................85, 116
Frame size/frame rate ........... 116, 239
Framing grid display........................264
Frequency response ........................245
Full-frame playback ...........11, 49, 122
Function buttons ................................ 24
FV lock......................................... 357, 411
FX.................................................. 106, 119
G
Group flash.......................368, 376, 384
H
HDMI.................................. 306, 345, 443
HDMI cable ......................................... 414
HDMI connector ............................... 345
HDMI recorders................................. 346
Headphone volume ........................ 245
Headphones....................................... 245
Help..........................................................20
Hi ...............................................................80
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......... 207
High ISO NR ...............................183, 241
Highlight display .............................. 292
Highlights............................62, 108, 126
Highlight-weighted......................... 108
Histogram ..................................126, 127
I
Image area .................................119, 165
Image comment ............................... 303
Image Dust Off ref photo .............. 301
Image overlay .................................... 326
Image quality............................104, 166
Image review ............................123, 156
Image sensor........................ 2, 421, 427
Image size ..................................106, 166
Incandescent (White balance).64, 98
In-focus indicator ................................61
Information display .........15, 298, 401
Interval timer shooting .................. 212
ISO sensitivity ....................80, 169, 240
i-TTL.................................... 352, 353, 408
J
JPEG....................................................... 104
L
L (large)................................................. 106
Landscape (Set Picture Control) ....94
Language ..................................... 38, 294
LED lamp ............................................. 307
Lens.................................................36, 446
Lens mount ........................................... 36
Lens mounting mark ......................... 36
Limit AF-area mode selection ......254
Limit monitor mode selection .....298
Limit selectable image area ..........262
LINK mode................................. 307, 365
Lo .............................................................. 80
Location data ........................... 130, 306
Long exposure NR ............................183
Low-light AF .......................................255
M
M (medium) .........................................106
Main command dial........................... 17
Manage Picture Control ....... 179, 241
Manual................................. 73, 352, 360
Manual focus ................................. 53, 61
Manual focus ring in AF mode.....256
Matrix metering.................................108
Max. continuous release ................261
Maximum aperture ..........................412
Maximum sensitivity.................81, 169
Memory buffer..................................... 86
Memory card ..................... 32, 462, 463
Memory card capacity.....................463
Menu guide.........................................143
Metering...............................................108
MF.............................................................. 53
Microphone .............................. 118, 416
Microphone sensitivity ......... 118, 244
Minimum aperture ...........................459
Minimum shutter speed.................169
Mired .....................................................172
Mode dial............................................... 70
Mode dial lock release ...................... 70
Modeling flash ...................................267
Monitor..................................... 6, 10, 398
Monitor brightness ..........................295
Monitor color balance.....................296
Monitor mode button..........................8
Technical Notes 469
Monitor pre-flash ............................. 411
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ...
94
Mount adapter.................................. 455
Movie file type................................... 239
Movie quality............................ 116, 239
Movie shooting menu...........146, 238
Movie-record button .........................46
Movies.................................... 45, 49, 114
Multi selector........................................18
Multiple exposure............................ 200
My Menu ............................................. 331
N
Natural light auto (White balance) ....
64, 98
NEF (RAW).................................. 104, 168
NEF (RAW) processing.................... 317
NEF (RAW) recording ...................... 168
Neutral (Set Picture Control)...........94
N-Log setting..................................... 348
Non-CPU lens..................................... 300
Number of focus points................. 253
Number of shots............................... 465
Playback display options ...............155
Playback folder ..................................155
Playback menu ........................ 143, 154
Playback zoom.................. 12, 127, 139
Portrait (Set Picture Control) .......... 94
Power connector .................... 413, 418
Power off delay..................................260
Power switch........................................ 38
Preset manual (White balance)..... 65,
98, 101, 175
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down .................................... 44
Press the shutter-release button
halfway ................................................. 43
Prioritize viewfinder..............................9
Problems and solutions..................388
Product serial number .........................4
Programmed auto.............................. 71
Protecting photographs .................. 69
Q
Quick crop ...........................................132
Quick sharp........................................... 97
Quick wireless control..370, 378, 385
O
R
OK button .................................. 279, 290
Optical AWL .............................. 375, 382
Optical/radio AWL ........................... 383
Overview data ................................... 131
Radio AWL ...........................................364
Rating....................................................159
Rear-curtain sync ..............................107
Recent settings........................ 331, 335
Rechargeable Li-ion battery .28, 413,
442
Red-eye correction...........................323
Red-eye reduction............................107
Release button to use dial.............283
Release mode..............................84, 111
Remote cord................................78, 414
Remote flash photography. 349, 362
Remote repeating .........372, 380, 385
Removing the lens from the camera .
37
P
Peaking highlights........................... 264
Perspective control ......................... 325
Photo information ........................... 124
Photo shooting menu ...........143, 160
Photo/movie selector.................41, 45
PictBridge................................... 342, 443
Picture Controls ................ 94, 177, 241
Pinpoint AF.................................. 54, 113
Playback ................................ 11, 49, 122
470 Technical Notes
Repeating flash ........................353, 360
Reset .........................161, 239, 250, 313
Reset all settings............................... 313
Reset custom settings .................... 250
Reset movie shooting menu........ 239
Reset photo shooting menu ........ 161
Reset user settings.................... 76, 294
Resize.................................................... 321
Restoring default settings............. 387
Retouch menu................................... 314
Reverse indicators............................ 283
RGB ..................................... 126, 165, 182
Rotate tall...................................123, 157
S
S (small) ................................................ 106
Same as photo settings.................. 114
Save current frame .......................... 138
Save user settings ..................... 75, 294
Save/load settings ........................... 311
Select date .................................141, 142
Select to send to smart device .... 134
Select to send/deselect.................. 134
Self-timer.............................87, 111, 259
Sensitivity...............................................80
Set Picture Control...........94, 177, 241
Setup menu...............................152, 293
Shade (White balance) ......................98
Shooting data.................................... 128
Shutter spd & aperture lock.......... 281
Shutter speed ................................71, 73
Shutter type ....................................... 262
Shutter-priority auto ..........................71
Shutter-release button...............43, 44
Shutter-release button AE-L......... 259
Side-by-side comparison............... 329
Silent photography .................. 67, 237
Single frame ......................... 84, 87, 111
Single-point AF .................54, 113, 121
Size ...............................................106, 166
Slide show........................................... 158
Slot empty release lock...................310
Slow sync .............................................107
Slow-motion movies........................117
Smart device....................109, 308, 336
SnapBridge...................................40, 336
Specifications .....................................431
Splitscreen display zoom ...............270
Spot........................................................108
Standard (Set Picture Control) ....... 94
Standard i-TTL fill-flash ...................408
Standby timer ................... 44, 260, 306
Storage folder ....................................161
Store points by orientation ...........253
Straighten............................................324
Sub-command dial............................. 17
Subject tracking .................................. 58
Sub-selector................................... 17, 89
Sync. release mode options..........261
T
Text entry......................................13, 162
Thumbnail ............................................. 12
TIFF (RGB).............................................104
Tilting monitor........................................3
Time......................................................... 78
Time zone .....................................39, 295
Time zone and date ..................39, 295
Timecode .............................................246
Time-lapse movie .............................223
Touch controls .....................10, 59, 305
Touch screen ................................. 10, 59
Touch shutter................................ 10, 59
Trademark Information ..................444
Trim........................................................320
Trimming movies.................... 135, 329
Tripod...................................................... 78
Troubleshooting ...............................387
U
Unified flash control ........................353
USB............................................... 337, 342
Technical Notes 471
User settings ............................... 75, 294
Using an on-camera flash ............. 350
V
Vibration reduction .......112, 189, 243
View all in continuous mode ....... 264
Viewfinder ......................................8, 404
Viewfinder brightness .................... 297
Viewfinder color balance .............. 297
Viewfinder eyepiece ...................8, 415
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ............... 415
Viewfinder focus.................................... 8
ViewNX-i....................................... 68, 337
Vignette control ...................... 184, 242
Virtual horizon...............................15, 16
Vivid (Set Picture Control)................94
Volume.......................................... 50, 305
W
WB (White balance).....................63, 98
WB bracketing................................... 195
White balance ...............................63, 98
Wide-area AF ..................... 55, 113, 121
Wi-Fi .............................................109, 341
Wind noise reduction ..................... 245
Wireless................................................ 341
Wireless remote (WR) options ..... 307
Wireless remote controller . 307, 364,
415
Wireless transmitter (WT-7) 309, 341,
414
X
XQD memory card ........................... 462
472 Technical Notes
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB9E03(11)
6MOA1011-03
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising